BA01733D/06/EN/02.21
71506074
2021-01-01

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.00.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promass Q 300
Coriolis flowmeter
EtherNet/IP

Keep cover

Sp a
nnu

ng

öff
ne

n

hile
tw
gh

ti

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.1
1.2

6.1

6.3

Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.2 Environmental and process
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 23
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 26
6.2.3 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . 26
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 27
6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 27
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

7Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

7.1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

7.6
7.7

Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 29
7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.1.4 Device plugs available . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug . . . . . . 32
7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 32
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 33
7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a
network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.3 Connecting the remote display andoperating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 39
Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 39
7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.5.1 Setting the device address . . . . . . . . . 43
7.5.2 Activating the default IP address . . . . 44
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 44
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

8.1
8.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 47
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 57
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 57
8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

1.3

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18

5

Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.1
5.2

Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

5.3

Endress+Hauser

6.2

7.2

7.3
7.4
7.5

8.3

3

Table of contents

8.4

8.5

8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.10 User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Access to the operating menu via the Webbrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 62
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 68
8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

9

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

9.1

9.5

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 74
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 74
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Overview of system files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Integrating the measuring device in thesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.4.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.4.2 Input and output groups . . . . . . . . . . 76
Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP . . . . . 86

10

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

9.2
9.3
9.4

10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 91
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 92
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.5.3 Configuring the communicationinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
10.5.4 Selecting and setting the medium . . . 97
10.5.5 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 98
10.5.6 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 99
10.5.7 Configuring the status input . . . . . . 100
10.5.8 Configuring the current output . . . . 101
10.5.9 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10.5.10 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 113
10.5.11 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 116
10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 122
10.5.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe
detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.6

Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter theaccess code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.6.2 Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.6.3 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 126
10.6.4 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 127
10.6.5 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 137
10.6.8 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access 143
10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 144
10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

11

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 147
11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 147
11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.4.1 "Measured variables" submenu . . . . . 148
11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 150
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 158

12.1
12.2

General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 162
12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 164
Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 164
12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 165
Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 166
Diagnostic information via communicationinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information 167
Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 167
12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 167
Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 168
12.8.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

12.3
12.4
12.5

12.6
12.7
12.8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

12.8.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 169
12.8.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 173
12.8.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
12.9 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
12.10 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.11 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 182
12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 183
12.11.3 Overview of information events . . . . 183
12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

13

Table of contents

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

13.1

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 188
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

14

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 189
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 189
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 190
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 190

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 192
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
16.11 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phasesof the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance andstorage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through totroubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols

1.2.1

Safety symbols

DANGER

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result inserious or fatal injury.
WARNING

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inserious or fatal injury.
CAUTION

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inminor or medium injury.
NOTICE

This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Protective Earth (PE)A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3

Communication symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

About this document

SymbolMeaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Flat blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation.
Reference to page.

A

Reference to graphic.
Notice or individual step to be observed.
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps.
Result of a step.
Help in the event of a problem.
Visual inspection.

1.2.6

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3, ...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections

Endress+Hauser

Hazardous area

7

About this document

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Symbol.

Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code→  2221.3.1

Standard documentation

Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification• Storage and transport• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating
Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing themeasuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description• Installation• Electrical connection• Operation options• System integration• Commissioning• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters

1.3.2

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed atthose who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

1.4

Registered trademarks

EtherNet/IP™
Trademark of ODVA, Inc.
8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Safety instructions

2

Safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in this manual is intended only for the flow measurementof liquids and gases.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is anincreased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for theintended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospherictemperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation→  8.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

9Safety instructions

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks

LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents aburn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.

2.3

Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
For welding work on the piping:‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4

Operational safety

Risk of injury.

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability,‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

10

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

2.6

Safety instructions

IT security

Our warranty is valid only if the device is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the device and associateddata transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

2.7

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.
Function/interface

Factory setting

Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write
protection switch →  11

Not enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Access code(also applies for Web server login or
FieldCare connection) →  12

Not enabled(0000).

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning.

WLAN(order option in display module)

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

WLAN security mode

Enabled (WPA2PSK)Do not change.

WLAN passphrase(password) →  12

Serial number

Assign an individual WLAN passphrase duringcommissioning.

WLAN mode

Access Point

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Web server→  12

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13–

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to theparameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  145.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.

Endress+Hauser

11

Safety instructions

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  144).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  70), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with theIEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  137).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator foraccess.
General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  144

2.7.3

Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  60). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45), the connection
for EtherNet/IP signal transmission (RJ45 connector) or the WLAN interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:
The "Description of Device Parameters" document →  223.

12

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

2.7.4

Safety instructions

Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of accessauthorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface(CDI-RJ45)!
Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA,
GB, MA, MB, NA, NB
The device can be integrated in a ring topology. The device is integrated via theterminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the connection to theservice interface (CDI-RJ45) →  38.

Endress+Hauser

13

Product description

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

3

Product description

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1

Product design
2

1

4

3

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

i sp

la y

e

D

Nicht

I/O

ar
ES

C

–
+
E

5
A0029586

1
1
2
3
4
5

14

Important components of a measuring device
Connection compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Electronics compartment coverSensorEndress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?

Do the nameplate data
match the ordering
information on the delivery
note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the envelope present withaccompanying documents?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  16.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:• Nameplate specifications• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial number from nameplates in the Endress+Hauser Operations App or scan
the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate using the Endress+Hauser Operations
App: All information about the device is displayed.

Endress+Hauser

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The "Additional standard documentation on the device"→  8 and "Supplementarydevice-dependent documentation"→  8 sections• The W@M Device Viewer: enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate
1 2

3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

20

6

19
7
18
17
16
15
14

8
i

i

Date:

13

12

11

9

10
A0029192

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

16

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Manufacturing location
Name of the transmitter
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Degree of protection
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Permitted temperature range for cable
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)Information on cable gland
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

4.2.2

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Sensor nameplate
1

2
3
4
5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

6

7
14
13
i

8

i
Date:

9
10

12

11
A0029199

3
1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Example of a sensor nameplate
Name of the sensor
Manufacturing location
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Nominal diameter of the sensor; flange nominal diameter/nominal pressure; sensor test pressure; medium
temperature range; material of measuring tube and manifold; sensor-specific information: e.g. pressure rangeof sensor housing, wide-range density specification (special density calibration)
Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
Flow direction
Manufacturing date: year-month2-D matrix code
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
CE mark, C-Tick
Surface roughness
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE+).

Endress+Hauser

17

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3
SymbolProline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Symbols on measuring device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Storage and transport

5

Storage and transport

5.1

Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature→  208

5.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They
prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.

5.2.1

Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

Endress+Hauser

19

Storage and transport

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

5.2.2

Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3

Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

5.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap that complies with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)• Packaging• Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol• Carrying and securing materials• Disposable plastic pallet• Plastic straps• Plastic adhesive strips• Filler material
Paper pads

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Installation

6

Installation

6.1

Installation conditions

6.1.1

Mounting position

Mounting location

A0028772

To prevent measuring errors arising from accumulation of gas bubbles in the measuring
tube, avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe:• Highest point of a pipeline.
• Directly upstream of a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.
Installation in down pipes
However, the following installation suggestion allows for installation in an open verticalpipeline. Pipe restrictions or the use of an orifice with a smaller cross-section than thenominal diameter prevent the sensor running empty while measurement is in progress.

1

2

3
4

5
A0028773

4
1
2
3
4
5

Endress+Hauser

Installation in a down pipe (e.g. for batching applications)
Supply tankSensorOrifice plate, pipe restriction
Valve
Batching tank21

Installation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

DN

Ø orifice plate, pipe restriction

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

25

1

14

0.55

50

2

28

1.10

80

3

50

1.97

100

4

65

2.60

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
Orientation
A

Recommendation
1)

Vertical orientation

A0015591

B

2)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
top

Exceptions:→  5,  22
A0015589

C

3)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atbottomExceptions:→  5,  22
A0015590

D→  23 4)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atside
A0015592

1)
2)
3)
4)

This orientation is recommended to ensure self-draining.
Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain theminimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
Not recommended for inhomogeneous media.

If a sensor is installed horizontally with a curved measuring tube, match the position of thesensor to the fluid properties.

1

2
A0028774

5
1
2

22

Orientation of sensor with curved measuring tube
Avoid this orientation for fluids with entrained solids: Risk of solids accumulating.
Avoid this orientation for outgassing fluids: Risk of gas accumulating.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Installation

Inlet and outlet runs
No special precautions need to be taken for fittings that create turbulence, such as valves,elbows or T-pieces, as long as no cavitation occurs.

A0029322

A0029323

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section .

6.1.2

Environmental and process requirements

Ambient temperature range
Measuring device• –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)• Order code for "Test, certificate", option JP:–50 to +60 °C (–58 to +140 °F)

Readability of the local
display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside thetemperature range.

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature→  209‣ If operating outdoors:
Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
You can order a weather protection cover from Endress+Hauser. →  191.
Vibrations
The operational reliability of the measuring system is not affected by plant vibrations.

6.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Drainability
The measuring tubes can be completely drained and protected against solids build-up in
vertical orientation.
Sanitary compatibility• When installing in hygienic applications, please refer to the information in the"Certificates and approvals/hygienic compatibility" section →  219• In the case of measuring devices with the order code for "Housing", option B"Stainless, hygienic", to seal the connection compartment cover, screw it closed
finger-tight and then tighten it by another 45° (corresponds to 15 Nm).
Rupture disk
Information that is relevant to the process: →  211.

Endress+Hauser

23

Installation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

LWARNING
Danger from medium escaping!
Medium escaping under pressure can cause injury or material damage.
‣ Take precautions to prevent danger to persons and damage if the rupture disk is
actuated.
‣ Observe information on the rupture disk sticker.
‣ Make sure that the function and operation of the rupture disk is not impeded throughthe installation of the device.
‣ Do not use a heating jacket.
‣ Do not remove or damage the rupture disk.
The position of the rupture disk is indicated by a sticker beside it.
The transportation guard must be removed.
The existing connecting nozzles are not intended for the purpose of rinsing or pressure
monitoring, but instead serve as the mounting location for the rupture disk.
In the event of a failure of the rupture disk, a drain device can be screwed onto the female
thread of the rupture disk in order to drain off any escaping medium.

i

RUPTURE DISK

1

2

3
A0030346

1
2
3

Rupture disk label
Rupture disk with 1/2" NPT female thread and 1" width across flat
Transportation guard

For information on the dimensions: see the "Mechanical construction" section of the"Technical Information" document
Zero point adjustment
All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  204. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures orvery high-viscosity fluids).

24

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Installation

Protective cover
280 (11.0)

255 (10.0)

134 (5.3)

12 (0.47)

30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)

146 (5.75)

A0029553

6

Engineering unit mm (in)Cover locking
NOTICE
Order code for "Housing", option L "Cast, stainless": The covers of the transmitter
housing are provided with a borehole to lock the cover.
The cover can be locked using screws and a chain or cable provided by the customer.
‣ It is recommended to use stainless steel cables or chains.
‣ If a protective coating is applied, it is recommended to use a heat shrink tube to protect
the housing paint.
1
1

2

1
2

SW 2.5M3

5 (0.2) min. 15 (0.6)

A0029800

1
2

Cover borehole for the securing screw
Securing screw to lock the cover

Determining the pitch angle and roll angle
For correct measurement, the pitch angle and roll angle must be determined andentered in the Installation angle pitch parameter (→  127) and the Installation
angle roll parameter (→  127) with a tolerance of ±10 °.

Endress+Hauser

25

Installation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Pitch angle

Roll angle0°α+/-180°β

0°+/-180°
A0032309

A0032310

The possible pitch angle that can be configured is the blue
area of angle α.

The possible roll angle that can be configured is theblue area of angle β.

6.2

Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1

Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools

6.2.2

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

6.2.3

Mounting the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of theprocess connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the seals are clean and undamaged.
‣ Secure the seals correctly.
1.

Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the nameplate of the sensor matches theflow direction of the fluid.

2.

Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.
A0029263

26

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Installation

6.2.4

Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

E

e

e

E

ar

ar

1.

3 mm

2.

4 mm

3.
A0029993

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Release the fixing screw.

4.

Turn the housing to the desired position.

5.

Firmly tighten the securing screw.

6.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

7.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.2.5

Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

ES

C

E

–

E

ar

e

E

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

e

+

3.
A0030035

Endress+Hauser

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.

4.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

5.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

27

Installation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

6.3

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature →  209• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document)• Ambient temperature• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium temperature• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

28



Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through thepiping →  22?

Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?



Are the securing screw and securing clamp tightened securely?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7

Electrical connection

Electrical connection

NOTICEThe measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so thatthe power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1

Connection conditions

7.1.1

Required tools• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2

Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.
Protective ground cable
Cable ≥2.08 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.
Permitted temperature range• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cableStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
EtherNet/IP
The standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex specifies CAT 5 as the minimum category fora cable used for EtherNet/IP. CAT 5e and CAT 6 are recommended.
For more information on planning and installing EtherNet/IP networks, please referto the "Media Planning and Installation Manual. EtherNet/IP" of ODVA Organization
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.

Endress+Hauser

29

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for the connecting cable – Remote display and operating module
DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable
A cable is supplied depending on the order option• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option Oor• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E
Standard cable2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield≤200 pF/m

L/R≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length

5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Standard cable - customer-specific cableNo cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max.
300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.

30

Standard cable4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield

Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R

Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Endress+Hauser

Electrical connection

Cross-section

Max. cable length for use in
Non-hazardous area,
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG)

120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG)

180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG)

240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG)

300 m (1 000 ft)

31Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7.1.3

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

Input/output 1

2 (–)

Input/output 2

EtherNet/IP(RJ45 connector)

24 (+)

Input/output 3

25 (–)

22 (+)

23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label interminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  39.

7.1.4

Device plugs available

Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!
Order code for "Input; output 1", option NA "EtherNet/IP"
Order code for"Electrical connection"

2

3

L, N, P, U

Connector M12 × 1–

Connector M12 × 1

Connector M12 × 1

R
1)

2)

Cable entry/connection

1) 2)

,S

1) 2)

,T

1) 2)

,V

1) 2)

Cannot be combined with an external WLAN antenna (order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8) of
an RJ45 M12 adapter for the service interface (order code for "Accessories mounted", option NB) or of theremote display and operating module DKX001
Suitable for integrating the device in a ring topology.

7.1.5

Pin assignment of device plug
Pin

2

3

1

4
A0032047

7.1.6

Assignment

1

+

Tx

2

+

Rx

3

-

Tx

4

-

Rx

CodingPlug/socket

D

SocketPreparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1.

32

Remove dummy plug if present.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Electrical connection

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  29.

7.2

Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the devicespecific Ex documentation.

7.2.1

Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3
4

A0026781

1
2
3

4

Terminal connection for supply voltage
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display andoperating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)In addition to connecting the device via EtherNet/IP and the available inputs/outputs,
additional connection options are also available:• Integrate into a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) →  37.
• Integrate the device into a ring topology →  38.
Connecting the EtherNet/IP connector
3.
n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
ter

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

C

ES
C

–

–

+

+

E

E
ES
C

ar

3 mm

+

4.

1.

ar

2.

e

e

–

E

3.
A0029813

Endress+Hauser

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

33

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Remove the display module holder.

I/O

e

e

Nicht

6.

Powr ente fn nun g öf whe
enichtnnunNpat op
d vrir
S nozeDoergis ouionen patens
Neus
so
I/O

un
te r

un
te r

er

I/O

n
f ne
öf

Nich PoSp tan un w
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

n
f ne
öf

Nich PoSp tan un w
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

Nicht

4.

ar

ar

ES

ES

C

–

C

–
+

+
E

E

5.
A00298145.

Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6.

Open the terminal cover.
11.
22 mm
24 mm

9.

7.

Nich
t

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
D nn nte er
eno no ungre töN rgizop ffn
soe pa eden w en
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

8.

e

2
≤4

ar

)
.6

(1

10.

A0033722

7.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

8.

Strip the cable and cable ends and connect to the RJ45 connector.

9.

Connect the protective ground.

10. Plug in the RJ45 connector.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the EtherNet/IP connection process.

34

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Electrical connection

Connecting the supply voltage and additional inputs/outputs
1.

2.
10 (0.4)

Nicht

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

e

mm (in)
ar

ES
C

–

3.

+
E

A0033983

1.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

2.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

3.

Connect the protective ground.

5.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

un
te r

22 mm

e

24 mm
ar
ES

C

–
+
E

4.
A0033984

Endress+Hauser

4.

Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  32.

5.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.

6.

Close the terminal cover.

7.

Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.

8.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

9.

Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

35

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598736Engineering unit mm (in)1.

To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes2.

while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7.2.2

Electrical connection

Integrating the transmitter into a network

This section only presents the basic options for integrating the device into a network.
For information on the procedure to follow to connect the transmitter correctly →  33.
Integrating via the service interface
The device is integrated via the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:• Recommended cable: CAT 5e, CAT 6 or CAT 7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660)• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm• Bending radius: 5 x cable thickness

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngre töNe rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

e

Nich
t

I/O

ar

2
≤4
)

.6
(1

1

A0033703

1

Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

Endress+Hauser

37

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Integrating into a ring topology
The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) andthe connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
Note the following when connecting:• Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660)• Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm
• Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm• Bending radius: 2.5 x cable thickness

e

Nich
t

un
te r

n
f ne
öf

N
Spicht Pow
a u
Do nnunte er
en no ngre töNe rgizope ffne
so pa ed n w n
us s oheten uvnsiorir
n

ar

2
≤4
)

.6
(1

1
2

A00337171
2EtherNet/IP connection
Service interface (CDI-RJ45)

An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

38

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Electrical connection

7.2.3

Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  191.

Gnd

Vcc• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for thefollowing housing versions, order code for "Housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated"• Option L "Cast, stainless"• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A

B

81 82 83 84
1
2

3

Gnd

4
5

Vcc

81 82 83 84
A

B

A0027518

1
2
3
4
5

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)Connecting cable
Measuring device
Protective earth (PE)

7.3

Ensuring potential equalization

7.3.1

Requirements

No special measures for potential equalization are required.

Endress+Hauser

39

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7.4

Special connection instructions

7.4.1

Connection examples

EtherNet/IP
1

3

2

4

5

5
A0028767

8
1
2
3
4
5

Connection example for EtherNet/IP
Control system (e.g. PLC)
Ethernet switch
Observe cable specifications
Device plug
Transmitter

EtherNet/IP: DLR (Device Level Ring)
1

2

3

4

5

4

A0027544

1
2
3
4
5

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Ethernet switch
Observe cable specifications →  29
Transmitter
Connecting cable between the two transmitters

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

9
1
2
3

40

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)
Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Electrical connection

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 10
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 11
1
2
3

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  198

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 12
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  198

41

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 13
1
2
3

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  199

Current input
1

2

3

4

A0028915

 14
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
Terminal box
External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 15
1
2
3

42

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Electrical connection

7.5

Hardware settings

7.5.1

Setting the device address

The IP address of the measuring device can be configured for the network via DIP switches.
Addressing data
IP address and configuration options
1st octet

2nd octet

3rd octet

4th octet

192.

168.

1.

XXX

↓
Can only be configured via software addressing↓
Can be configured via software addressing
and hardware addressing

IP address range

1 to 254 (4th octet)

IP address broadcast

255

Addressing mode ex
works

Software addressing; all DIP switches for hardware addressing are set to OFF.

IP address ex works

DHCP server active

Software addressing: The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter(→  96).
Setting the IP address
Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1

IP Address setting(last octet)

The default IP address may not be activated →  44.

A0029635

Endress+Hauser

1.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary.

3.

Set the desired IP address using the corresponding DIP switches on the I/O
electronics module.

4.

Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The configured device address is used once the device is restarted.

43

Electrical connection

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7.5.2

Activating the default IP address

The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device expects an IP
address to be assigned by the network. This function can be disabled and the device can be
set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212 by DIP switch.
Activating the default IP address by DIP switch
Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

Off On1
2
3
4A00344991.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

3.

Set DIP switch No. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF → ON.

4.

Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.

7.6

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
A0029278

6.
44

Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

7.7

Endress+Hauser

Electrical connection

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Do the cables used meet the requirements?

Do the cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  44?



If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?

45

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

8Operation options

8.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5

6
A0034513

1
2
3
4
5
6

46

Local operation via display module
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

8.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  223

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 16

Endress+Hauser

Schematic structure of the operating menu

47

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

8.2.2

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
For custody transfer, once the device has been put into circulation or sealed, its
operation is restricted.
Menu/parameter
Language

Operation
Setup

task-oriented

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuring the operational
display• Reading measured values• Defining the operating language• Defining the Web server operating language• Resetting and controlling totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of themeasurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of thecommunication interface

Wizards for fast commissioning:• Setting the system units• Configuration of the communication interface• Defining the medium• Displaying the I/O/configuration• Configuring the inputs• Configuring the outputs• Configuration of the operational display• Setting the low flow cut off• Configuring partial and empty pipe detection• Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuring the WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

48"Maintenance" role
Fault elimination:• Diagnostics and elimination ofprocess and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Menu/parameter
Expertfunction-oriented

Operation options

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Tasks that require detailed
knowledge of the function of thedevice:• Commissioning measurements
under difficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult
conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern themeasurement or the communication interface.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Input
Configuration of the status input.
• Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

8.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1

Operational display
1
2

XXXXXXXXX

4F

31120.50kg/h

5A0029348

1
2
3
4
5

Operational display
Device tag
Status area
Display area for measured values (4-line)
Operating elements→  55

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  162• F: Failure• C: Function check• S: Out of specification• M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  163• : Alarm• : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)

Endress+Hauser

49

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured variable

Measurement channel
numberDiagnostic behavior

↓

↓

↓

ExampleAppears only if a diagnostics
event is present for thismeasured variable.

Measured values
SymbolMeaning
Mass flow• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density
Temperature
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Output The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.
Status input

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  163

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  117).

50

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

8.3.2

2

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3

2

3

/../Select medium
Select medium

Operator
Locking status
Display

Liquid4

4

5

5A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

A0013995-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  55

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of thefollowing elements:• In the submenu:
Display symbol for menu
• In the wizard:
Display symbol for wizard↓
ExamplesOmission symbol for
operating menu levels in
betweenName of current• Submenu• Wizard• Parameters

↓

↓

/ ../

Display/ ../Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  52
Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu• The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  162• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  57

Endress+Hauser

51

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

52

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

8.3.3

Operation options

Editing view

Numeric editor
1

0
5
+

2

1
6
–

+0.000 Xx
2
3
8
7

4
9

3

4
A0034250

 17
1
2
3
4

For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

Entry display area
Input screen
Confirm, delete or reject entry
Operating elements

Text editor
1

2

XxxxxxxA B C D E F G H I J K
L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z

6
7

3
5
4

A0034114

 18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

Entry display area
Current input screen
Change input screen
Operating elements
Move entry position
Delete entry
Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing viewOperating key(s)Meaning
Minus keyMove the entry position to the left.
Plus keyMove the entry position to the right.

Endress+Hauser

53

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operating key(s)MeaningEnter key
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

+

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Input screens
SymbolMeaning
Upper case
Lower caseNumbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _Umlauts and accents

Controlling data entries
SymbolMeaningMove entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered

54

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

8.3.4

Operating elements

Operating key(s)Meaning
Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)• If the keypad lock is active:
Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not active:
Press the key for 3 s: the context menu opens along with the option for activating the
keypad lock.

+

8.3.5

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on

l/hA0034608-EN

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

56

1.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

8.3.6

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  51
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

0098-1XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

8.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct accessEndress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 19

2.

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9

Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

58

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor- with symbols →  53, for a description of the operating elements →  55

8.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  144.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Accessauthorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the"Maintenance" user role.

‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status
After an access code has been defined.
1)

Read access

Write access



–– 1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted fromthe write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
sectionThe user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  144.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter (→  125) via the respective access
option.
1.
Endress+Hauser

After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.
59

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

2.

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, theKeylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4

Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1

Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation forthe device →  223

60

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

8.4.2

Operation options

Prerequisites

Computer hardware
Hardware

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have an RJ45
interface.

The operating unit must have a
WLAN interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45
connector.

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:• iOS• Android Microsoft Windows XP is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
Web browser

The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
deselected .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: Ifenter
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Webbrowser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.
installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display, Whenclear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections

Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  159

Endress+Hauser

61

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device

CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server

Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  67
IP address

If the IP address of the device is not known:• The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics → Device information → IP address• Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212.
The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device
expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can bedisabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212:
set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF → ON.

 Set the default IP address →  44.
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
DeviceWLAN interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server

Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  67
IP address

If the IP address of the device is not known:• The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics → Device information → IP address• Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212.
The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device
expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can bedisabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212:
set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF → ON.

 Set the default IP address →  44.
8.4.3

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device

621.

Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.

3.

The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and thecommunication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The IP address can be assigned to the measuring device in a variety of ways:• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), factory setting:
The IP address is automatically assigned to the measuring device by the automation
system (DHCP server).
• Hardware addressing:
The IP address is set via DIP switches →  43.
• Software addressing:
The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter (→  96) .
• DIP switch for "Default IP address":
To establish the network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the fixed IP
address 192.168.1.212 is used →  44.
The measuring device works with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), on
leaving the factory, i.e. the IP address of the measuring device is automatically assigned by
the automation system (DHCP server).
To establish a network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): set the "Default IP
address" DIP switch to ON. The measuring device then has the fixed IP address:
192.168.1.212. This address can now be used to establish the network connection.
1.

Via DIP switch 2, activate the default IP address 192.168.1.212: →  44.

2.

Switch on the measuring device.

3.

Connect to the computer using a cable →  69.

4.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

5.

Close any open Internet browsers.

6.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

64Start the Web browser on the computer.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

2.

Operation options

Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  140)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  159

8.4.4

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

Endress+Hauser

65

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

8.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Local display language
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device name• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  165• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the measuring device

Menu

66

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
 For
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management

Data exchange between PC and measuring device:• Device configuration:• Load settings from the device(XML format, save configuration)• Save settings to the device(XML format, restore configuration)• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)• Documents - Export documents:• Export backup data record(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)• Verification report(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• File for system integration - If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system
integration from the measuring device:
EtherNet/IP: EDS file• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Network
configuration

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in thenavigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection• Off• HTML Off• On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

On• The complete functionality of the web server is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

67

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP3.

If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  63.
If communication with the Web server was established via the default IP address
192.168.1.212, DIP switch No. 10 must be reset (from ON → OFF). Afterwards, the IP
address of the device is active again for network communication.

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via EtherNet/IP network
This communication interface is available in device versions with EtherNet/IP.
Star topology
1

2

3

4

5

5

5
A0032078

 20
1
2
3
4
5

Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: star topology

Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation)Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server orcomputer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Ethernet switch
Measuring device

Ring topology
The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) andthe service interface (CDI-RJ45).

68

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

1

2

3

4

5

5

5
A0033725

 21
1
2
3
4
5

Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: ring topology

Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation)Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server orcomputer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Ethernet switch
Measuring device

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

1
3

2

A0027563

 22
1
2
3

Endress+Hauser

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

69

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
3

1

4

5

2

6

3

4

7
A0034570

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) foraccessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)

Function

WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)
• Access point with DHCP server (default setting)• Network

Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels

1 to 11Degree of protection

IP67

Available antennas• Internal antenna• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place ofinstallation.

 Only one antenna active in each case!
Range• Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)

Materials (external antenna)• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickelplated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Connector: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.

70

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promass_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2

FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it isalso a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  69
• WLAN interface→  70
Typical functions:• Configuring parameters of transmitters• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S
Source for device description files
See information →  74
Establishing a connection
1.
Endress+Hauser

Start FieldCare and launch the project.
71

Operation options

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

2.

In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.

3.

Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.

4.

Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in thecontext menu that opens.

5.

Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.

6.

Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter toconfirm.

7.

Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status area with status signal→  165
Display area for current measured values
Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Working area
Range of action
Status area

8.5.3

DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

72

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation options

The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files
See information →  74

Endress+Hauser

73

System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

9System integration

9.1

Overview of device description files

9.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.00.zz• On the title page of the Operating Instructions• On the transmitter nameplate• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
versionRelease date of firmware version

10.2017---

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Manufacturer ID
Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer
ID

Device type ID

0x103B

Device type
Diagnostics → Device information → Device type

Device revision• Major revision 1• Minor revision 1• On the transmitter nameplate• Device revision
Diagnostics → Device information → Device
revision

Device profile

Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  187

9.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via
Service interface (CDI)

Sources for obtaining device descriptions

FieldCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

9.2

Overview of system files

System files

VersionDescription

How to acquire

Electronic Data
Sheet (EDS
system file)

2.1

Certified in accordance with thefollowing ODVA guidelines:• Conformance test
• Performance test
• PlugFest• www.endress.com → DownloadArea• EDS system file integrated in thedevice: can be downloaded via
the Web browser

Embedded EDS Support (File Object
0x37)
Add-on Profile
Level 374

• Majorrevision 1• Minorrevision 1

System file for "Studio 5000"
software (Rockwell Automation)www.endress.com → DownloadArea

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

9.3

Integrating the measuring device in the system

A detailed description of how to integrate the device into an automation system (e.g.
from Rockwell Automation) is available as a separate document: www.endress.com →Select country → Automation → Digital communication → Fieldbus device
integration → EtherNet/IP
Protocol-specific data →  202.

9.4

Cyclic data transmission

Cyclic data transmission when using the device master file (GSD).

9.4.1

Block model

The block model shows which input and output data the measuring device makes available
for implicit messaging. Cyclical data exchange is performed using an EtherNet/IP scanner,e.g. a distributed control system etc.
Measuring device

Transducer
Block

1)
2)
3)

Endress+Hauser

Input Assembly Fix(Assem100) 44 byte

→  77Mass flow fixed input
assembly(Assem106) 32 byte

Control system
Permanently assigned
input group→

Permanently assigned
input group→→  78Volume flow fixed input
assembly(Assem107) 62 byte

Permanently assigned
input group→→  78

Concentration fixed input
assembly 1)(Assem109) 66 byte

Permanently assigned
input group→→  78API Referenced corrections
fixed input assembly 2)→  79(Assem110) 64 byte

Permanently assigned
input group→

Water cut % fixed input
assembly 2)(Assem111) 80 byte

Permanently assigned
input group→→  79Heartbeat monitoring
fixed input assembly 3)(Assem112) 96 byte

Permanently assigned
input group→→  79Input assembly custom(Assem101) 88 byte

→  80Configurable
input group→

Output assembly fix(Assem102) 54 byte

→  81

Permanently assigned
output group←

Config assembly(Assem104) 2709 byte

→  83

Permanently assigned
configuration→

EtherNet/IP

Only available with the Concentration application package.
Only available with the Petroleum application package.
Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.

75

System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

9.4.2

Input and output groups

Possible configurations
Configuration 1: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Fix

Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 64398–

Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x 6664

5Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6444

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 2: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Fix
Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 68398–

Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x C7––

Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6444

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 3: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable
Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 68398–

Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x 6664

5Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6588

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 4: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable
Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 68398–

Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x C7––

Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6488

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 5: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Fix
Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 69––Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x 6664

5Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6444

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 6: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Fix

76

Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 69––Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x C7––

Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6544

5Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

Configuration 7: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable

Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)

Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 69––Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x 6664

5Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6488

5Instance

Size (byte)

Min. RPI (ms)Configuration 8: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable
Input Assembly Configurable

Configuration

0 x 69––Output Assembly Fix

O → T Configuration

0 x C7––

Input Assembly Fix

T → O Configuration

0 x 6588

5Possible connections
No.

#1

#2

#3

#4

#5

#6

#7

#8

#9

Number of connections

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Input assembly fixed (Assem100)

X

Mass flow fixed input assembly(Assem106)

X

Volume flow fixed input assembly(Assem107)
Input assembly custom (Assem101)
Viscosity fixed input assembly(Assem108)
Concentration fixed input assembly(Assem109)
API Referenced corrections fixed
input assembly (Assem110)
Water cut % fixed input assembly(Assem111)

X
X
X
X
X
X

Heartbeat monitoring fixed input
assembly (Assem112)

X

Permanently assigned input group
Input assembly fixed (Assem100), 44 byte
Description
1.

Endress+Hauser

Byte

File header (not visible)
1)

1-4

2.

Current diagnosis

5-8

3.

Mass flow

9-12

4.

Volume flow

13-16

5.

Corrected volume flow

17-20

6.

Temperature

21-24

7.

Density25-28

8.

Reference density

29-32

9.

Totalizer 1

33-36

77

System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Description

Byte

10.

Totalizer 2

37-40

11.

Totalizer 3

41-44

1)

Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP →  86

Mass flow fixed input assembly (Assem106), 32 byte
Description

Byte

1. File header (not visible)
2. Current diagnosis

1)

1)

1-4
5-8

3. Mass flow

9-12

4. Density

13-16

5. Temperature

17-20

6. Totalizer 1

21-24

7. Mass flow unit

25-26

8. Density unit

27-28

9. Temperature unit

29-30

10. Totalizer 1 unit

31-32

Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP →  86

Volume flow fixed input assembly (Assem107), 62 byte
Description

Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly

1-32

2. Volume flow

33-36

3. Corrected volume flow

37-40

4. Reference density

41-44

5. Totalizer 2

45-48

6. Totalizer 3

49-52

7. Volume flow unit

53-54

8. Corrected volume flow unit

55-56

9. Reference density unit

57-58

10. Totalizer 2 unit

59-60

11. Totalizer 3 unit

61-62

Concentration fixed input assembly (Assem109), 66 byte 1)
Description

78

Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly

1-32

2. Target mass flow

33-36

3. Carrier mass flow

37-40

4. Target volume flow

41-44

5. Carrier volume flow

45-48

6. Target corrected volume flow

49-52

7. Carrier corrected volume flow

53-56

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

Description

1)

Byte

8. Concentration

57-60

9. Volume flow unit

61-62

10. Corrected volume flow unit

63-64

11. Concentration unit

65-66

Only available with the Concentration application package.

API Referenced corrections fixed input assembly (Assem110), 60 byte 1)
Description

1)

Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly

1-32

2. Alternative reference density

33-36

3. GSV flow

37-40

4. Alternative GSV flow

41-44

5. NSV flow

45-48

6. Alternative NSV flow

49-52

7. S&W volume flow

53-56

8. Volume flow unit

57-58

9. Reference density unit

59-60

Only available with the Petroleum application package.

Water cut % fixed input assembly (Assem111), 76 byte 1)
Description

1)

Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly

1-32

2. Oil density

33-36

3. Water density

37-40

4. Water cut %41-44

5. Oil mass flow

45-48

6. Water mass flow

49-52

7. Oil volume flow

53-56

8. Water volume flow

57-60

9. Oil corrected volume flow

61-64

10. Water corrected volume flow

65-68

11. Volume flow unit

69-70

12. Corrected volume flow unit

71-72

13. Oil density unit

73-74

14. Water density unit

75-76

Only available with the Petroleum application package

Heartbeat monitoring fixed input assembly (Assem112), 100 byte 1)
Description

Endress+Hauser

Byte

1. Mass flow fixed input assembly

1-32

2. Signal asymmetry

33-36

79

System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Description

1)

Byte

3. Oscillation frequency 0

37-40

4. Oscillation frequency 1

41-44

5. Oscillation amplitude 045-48

6. Oscillation amplitude 149-52

7. Oscillation damping 053-56

8. Oscillation damping 1

57-60

9. Tube damping fluctuation 0

61-64

10. Tube damping fluctuation 1

65-68

11. Exciter current 0

69-72

12. Exciter current 1

73-76

13. HBSI

77-80

14. Frequency fluctuation 0

81-84

15. Frequency fluctuation 1

85-88

16. Electronic temperature

89-92

17. Carrier pipe temperature

93-96

18. Verification status

97-98

19. Verification results

99-100

Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.

Configurable input group
Input assembly custom (Assem101), 88 byte
Description

Format

1. - 10. Input values 1 to 10

Real

11. - 20. Input values 11 to 20

Double integer

Possible input values
Possible input values 1 to 10:• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow 1)• Carrier mass flow 1)• Target volume flow 1)• Carrier volume flow 1)• Target corrected volume flow 1)• Carrier corrected volume flow 1)• Density• Reference density• Concentration 1)

1)
2)
3)

80

• Temperature• Carrier tube temperature 2)• Electronic temperature• Oscillation frequency 0• Oscillation frequency 1 2)
• Oscillation amplitude 0• Oscillation amplitude 1 2)
• Frequency fluctuation 0• Frequency fluctuation 1 2)
• Oscillation damping 0• Oscillation damping 1• Tube damping fluctuation 0• Tube damping fluctuation 1• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• Exciter current 1 2)
• Monitoring of exciter current 0• Monitoring of exciter current 1 2)
• HBSI 2)• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Alternative reference density 3)• GSV flow 3)• Alternative GSV flow 3)• NSV flow 3)• Alternative NSV flow 3)• S&W volume flow 3)

Only available with the Concentration application package.
Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
Only available with the Petroleum application package.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

Possible input values 11 to 20:• Off• Actual diagnostics• Previous diagnosis• Mass flow unit
• Volume flow unit
• Corrected volume flow unit

• Temperature unit
• Density unit
• Reference density unit
• Concentration unit
• Current unit

• Totalizer 1 unit
• Totalizer 2 unit
• Totalizer 3 unit
• Verification results• Verification status• Status zero point adjustment

Permanently assigned output group
Output assembly fix (Assem102), 54 byte
Description (format)

Byte

Bit

1. Totalizer 1

10

2. Totalizer 2

1

3. Totalizer 32

4. Verification

3

5. Concentration of medium type4

6. Compensation, pressure

5

7. Reference density compensation

6

8. Compensation, temperature

7

9. S&W correction value %Endress+Hauser

2

Value

• 0: Enable• 1: Disable

0

10. Water cut %1

11. Flow override

2

12. Zero point adjustment3

13. Not used

414. Not used

5

15. Not used

6

16. Not used7

• 0: Enable• 1: Disable

17. Not used

3-4

16

–

18. Control totalizer 1 (integer)

5-6

16

19. Control totalizer 2 (integer)

7-8

16

20. Control totalizer 3 (integer)

9-10

16

• 32226 (0): Add• 32490 (1): Reset and stop
• 32228 (2): Default value and stop
• 198 (3): Reset and add• 199 (4): Default value and add• 32928 (3): Stop

21. Start verification (integer)

11-12

16

• 32823 (0): Cancel• 33158 (1): Start

81

System integration

82

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format)

Byte

Bit

Value

22. Select concentration of medium type

13-14

16

• 3062 (0) : Aqueous Fructose• 3063 (0) : Aqueous Glucose• 3068 (0) : Aqueous Hydrochloric Acid
• 3077 (0) : Aqueous Hydrogen
Peroxide• 3065 (0) : Aqueous Sucrose• 3064 (0) : Aqueous Invert Sugar• 3069 (0) : Aqueous Nitric Acid
• 3070 (0) : Aqueous Phosphoric Acid
• 3075 (0) : Aqueous Potassium
Hydroxide• 3071 (0) : Aqueous Sodium Hydroxide• 3060 (0) : Ethanol Water• 3061 (0) : Methanol Water• 3066 (0) : Ammonium Nitrate In
Water• 3067 (0) : Ferric Chloride In Water• 3073 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup
42• 3074 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup
55• 3072 (0) : High Fructose Corn Syrup90• 3092 (0) : Percent Volume / Percent
Mass• 3081 (0) : Wort
• 3082 (0) : Coef Set 1• 3083 (0) : Coef Set 2• 3084 (0) : Coef Set 3

23. Not used

15-16

16

–

24. External pressure (real)

17-20

32

Data format:
Byte 1-4: External pressure
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

25. External pressure unit (integer)

21-22

16

• 1610 (11): Pa a
• 1616 (12): kPa a• 1614 (237): MPa a• 1137 (7): bar• 1611 (240): Pa g
• 1617 (240): kPa a• 1615 (240): MPa a• 32797 (7): bar g• 1142 (6): psi a• 1143 (240): psi g

26. Not used

23-24

16

–

27. External reference density (real)

25-28

32

Data format:
Byte 1-4: External ref. density
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

28. External reference density unit (integer)

29-30

16

• 32840 (240): kg/Nm3• 32841 (240): kg/Nl• 32842 (240): g/Scm3• 32843 (240): kg/Scm3• 32844 (240): lb/Sft3

29. Not used

31-32

16

–

30. External temperature (real)

33-36

32

Data format:
Byte 1-4: External temperature
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

31. External temperature unit (integer)

37-38

16

• 1001 (32): °C• 1002 (33): °F• 1000 (35): K• 1003 (34): °R

32. Not used

39-40

16

–

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

Description (format)

Byte

Bit

Value

33. External value % S&W (real)

41-44

32

Data format:
Byte 1-4: External value, % S&W
Floating-point number (IEEE754)

34. External value, water cut % (real)

45-48

32

Data format:
Byte 1-4: External value, water cut %Floating-point number (IEEE754)

35 Flow override monitoring

49-50

16

• 33004 (0): Off• 33006 (1): On

36 Zero point adjustment monitoring

51-52

16

• 32823 (0): Cancel• 33242 (0): Active• 248 (0): Error zero point adjustment• 33158 (1): Start

Permanently assigned configuration group
Config assembly (Assem104), 2704 byte
Description (format)

Bits

Byte

Offset

1.

None

32

4

0

2.

Parameter 36

8

1

4

3.

None

8

1

5

4.

Parameter 87

System units

Mass flow unit

16

2

6

5.

Parameter 86

System units

Mass unit

16

2

8

6.

Parameter 93

System units

Volume flow unit

16

2

10

7.

Parameter 92

System units

Volume unit

16

2

12

8.

Parameter 80

System units

Corrected volume flow unit

16

2

14

9.

Parameter 79

System units

Corrected volume unit

16

2

16

10.

Parameter 81

System units

Density unit

16

2

18

11.

Parameter 89

System units

Reference density unit

16

2

20

12.

Parameter 91

System units

Temperature unit

16

2

22

13.

None

16

2

24

14.

Parameter 88

System units

Press. eng. unit

16

2

26

15.

Parameter 85

System units

Kinematic viscosity unit

16

2

28

16.

Parameter 84

System units

Dynamic viscosity unit

16

2

30

17.

Parameter 78

System units

Concentration unit

16

2

32

18.

Parameter 82

System units

Oil density unit

16

2

34

19.

Parameter 83

System units

Water density unit

16

2

36

20.

Parameter 90

System units

Water reference density unit

16

2

38

21.

None

32

4

40

22.

None

16

2

44

23.

Parameter 224–

Enter access code

16

2

46

24.

Parameter 94

Totalizer 1

Assign process variable

16

2

48

25.

Parameter 106

Totalizer 1

Unit totalizer

16

2

50

26.

Parameter 103

Totalizer 1

Totalizer operation mode

16

2

52

27.

Parameter 100

Totalizer 1

Failure mode

16

2

54

28.

Parameter 244

Totalizer operation

Preset value tot. 1

32

4

56

29.

Parameter 97

Totalizer operation

Control totalizer 1

16

2

60

Endress+Hauser–

Write protection

83System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format)

Bits

Byte

Offset30.

Parameter 95

Totalizer 2

Assign process variable

16

2

62

31.

Parameter 107

Totalizer 2

Unit totalizer

16

2

64

32.

Parameter 104

Totalizer 2

Totalizer operation mode

16

2

66

33.

Parameter 101

Totalizer 2

Failure mode

16

2

68

34.

Parameter 98

Totalizer operation

Control totalizer 2

16

2

70

35.

Parameter 245

Totalizer operation

Preset value tot. 2

32

4

72

36.

Parameter 96

Totalizer 3

Assign process variable

16

2

76

37.

Parameter 108

Totalizer 3

Unit totalizer

16

2

78

38.

Parameter 105

Totalizer 3

Totalizer operation mode

16

2

80

39.

Parameter 102

Totalizer 3

Failure mode

16

2

82

40.

Parameter 246

Totalizer operation

Preset value tot. 3

32

4

84

41.

Parameter 99

Totalizer operation

Control totalizer 3

16

2

88

42.

Parameter 16

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 1

16

2

90

43.

Parameter 27

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 2

16

2

92

44.

Parameter 29

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 3

16

2

94

45.

Parameter 30

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 4

16

2

96

46.

Parameter 31

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 5

16

2

98

47.

Parameter 32

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 6

16

2

100

48.

Parameter 33

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 7

16

2

102

49.

Parameter 34

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 8

16

2

104

50.

Parameter 35

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 9

16

2

106

51.

Parameter 17

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 10

16

2

108

52.

Parameter 18

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 11

16

2

110

53.

Parameter 19

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 12

16

2

112

54.

Parameter 20

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 13

16

2

114

55.

Parameter 21

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 14

16

2

116

56.

Parameter 22

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 15

16

2

118

57.

Parameter 23

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 16

16

2

120

58.

Parameter 24

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 17

16

2

122

59.

Parameter 25

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 18

16

2

124

60.

Parameter 26

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 19

16

2

126

61.

Parameter 28

Configurable input assembly

Input assembly position 20

16

2

128

62.

Parameter 38

Sensor adjustment

Flow direction

16

2

130

63.

Parameter 40

Process parameter

Flow override

16

2

132

64.

Parameter 37

Low flow cut off

Assign process variable

16

2

134

65.

Parameter 39

Empty pipe detection

Assign process variable

16

2

136

66.

Parameter 41

Corrected volume flow calculation

Corrected volume flow calculation

16

2

138

67.

Parameter 188

Low flow cut off

On value low flow cut off

32

4

140

68.

Parameter 187

Low flow cut off

Off value low flow cutoff

32

4

144

69.

Parameter 209

Low flow cut off

Pressure shock suppression

32

4

148

70.

Parameter 191

Empty pipe detection

Low value partial filled pipe detection

32

4

152

71.

Parameter 189

Partially filled pipe detection

High value partial filled pipe detection

32

4

156

72.

Parameter 190

Empty pipe detection

Response time part. filled pipe detect.

32

4

160

84

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

System integration

Description (format)

Bits

Byte

Offset73.

Parameter 182

Corrected volume flow calculation

Fixed reference density

32

4

164

74.

Parameter 186

Corrected volume flow calculation

Linear expansion coefficient

32

4

168

75.

Parameter 211

Corrected volume flow calculation

Square expansion coefficient

32

4

172

76.

Parameter 210

Corrected volume flow calculation

Reference temperature

32

4

176

77.

Parameter 183

Process parameter

Flow damping

32

4

180

78.

Parameter 184

Process parameter

Density damping

32

4

184

79.

Parameter 185

Process parameter

Temperature damping

32

4

188

80.

Parameter 5External compensation

Pressure compensation

16

2

192

81.

Parameter 6External compensation

Temperature mode

16

2

194

82.

Parameter 2

Medium selection

Select medium

16

2

196

83.

Parameter 3

Medium selection

Select gas type

16

2

198

84.

Parameter 119

External compensation

Pressure value

32

4

200

85.

Parameter 133

Medium selection

Temperature coefficient sound velocity

32

4

204

86.

Parameter 128

Medium selection

Reference sound velocity

32

4

208

87.

Parameter 115

Empty pipe detection

Max. damping empty pipe detection

32

4

212

88.

Parameter 241

Diagnostic settings

Alarm delay

32

4

216

89.

Parameter 58

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 046

8

1

220

90.

Parameter 57

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 140

8

1

221

91.

Parameter 59

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 144

8

1

222

92.

Parameter 60

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 374

8

1

223

93.

Parameter 61

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 302

8

1

224

94.

None

8

1

225

95.

Parameter 74

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 441

16

2

226

96.

Parameter 75

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 442

16

2

228

97.

Parameter 76

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 443

16

2

230

98.

Parameter 73

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 444

16

2

232

99.

Parameter 62

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 830

8

1

234

100.

Parameter 63

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 831

8

1

235

101.

Parameter 64

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 832

8

1

236

102.

Parameter 65

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 833

8

1

237

103.

Parameter 66

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 834

8

1

238

104.

Parameter 67

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 835

8

1

239

105.

Parameter 72

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 862

16

2

240

Endress+Hauser

85

System integration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Description (format)

Bits

Byte

Offset106.

Parameter 68

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 912

8

1

242

107.

Parameter 69

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 913

8

1

243

108.

Parameter 70

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 944

8

1

244

109.

Parameter 71

Diagnostic behavior

Assign behavior for diagnostic
information 948

8

1

245

110.

None

32

4

246

111.

None

16

2

250

112.

Parameter 12

16

2

252

113.

None

32

4

254

114.

None

16

2

258

115.

Parameter 138

Concentration

Coefficient A0

32

4

260

116.

Parameter 141

Concentration

Coefficient A1

32

4

264

117.

Parameter 144

Concentration

Coefficient A2

32

4

268

118.

Parameter 147

Concentration

Coefficient A3

32

4

272

119.

Parameter 150

Concentration

Coefficient A4

32

4

276

120.

Parameter 153

Concentration

Coefficient B1

32

4

280

121.

Parameter 156

Concentration

Coefficient B2

32

4

284

122.

Parameter 159

Concentration

Coefficient B3

32

4

288

123.

Parameter 162

Concentration

Coefficient D1

32

4

292

124.

Parameter 165

Concentration

Coefficient D2

32

4

296

125.

Parameter 168

Concentration

Coefficient D3

32

4

300

126.

Parameter 171

Concentration

Coefficient D4

32

4

304

127.

Parameter 55

Petroleum mode

16

2

308

128.

Parameter 53

API product group

16

2

310

129.

Parameter 54

API table selection

16

2

312

130.

None

16

2

314

131.

Parameter 237

Thermal expansion coefficient

32

4

316

132.

Parameter 220

Oil density sample

32

4

320

133.

Parameter 235

Oil temperature sample

32

4

324

134

Parameter 230

Oil pressure sample

32

4

328

135

Parameter 222

Water density sample

32

4

332

136

Parameter 236

Water temperature sample

32

4

336

Concentration

9.5

Liquid type

Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP

Status signal

86

No.

Short text

Value

000

–

F

882

Input signal

16777265

F

910

Tubes not oscillating

16777296

F

437

Configuration incompatible

16777312

F

242

Software incompatible

167773190Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Endress+Hauser

System integration

Status signal

No.

Short text

Value

F

252

Modules incompatible

16777323

F

272

Main electronic failure

16777337

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777340

F

271

Main electronic failure

16777341

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777343

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777344

F

825

Operating temperature

16777352

F

410

Data transfer

16777355

F

273

Main electronic failure

16777368

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777375

F

083

Memory content

16777376

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777377

F

022

Sensor temperature

16777406

F

022

Sensor temperature

16777407

F

833

Electronic temperature too low

16777409

F

832

Electronic temperature too high16777411

F

834

Process temperature too high16777413

F

835

Process temperature too low

16777414

F

270

Main electronic failure

16777428

F022

Sensor temperature

16777429

F

022

Sensor temperature

16777430

F

062

Sensor connection

16777435

F

062

Sensor connection

16777436

F

311

Electronic failure

16777441

F

273

Main electronic failure

16777445F

082

Data storage

16777447

F

190

Special event 216777450

F

273

Main electronic failure

16777483

F

390

Special event 3

16777490

F

062

Sensor connection

16777491

F

062

Sensor connection

16777492

F

992

Special event 13

16777503

F

590

Special event 416777508

F

990

Special event 516777509

F

991

Special event 916777510

F

591

Special event 8

16777511

F

391

Special event 716777512

F

191

Special event 616777513

F

262

Module connection

16777545

F

537

Configuration

16777546

F

201

Device failure

16777547

F

192

Special event 1016777552

F

392

Special event 1116777553

87

System integration

88

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Status signal

No.

Short text

Value

F

592

Special event 1216777554

F

382

Data storage

16777581

F

383

Memory content

16777582

F

283

Memory content

16777583

F

144

Measuring error too high16777671

C

411

Up-/download active

33554536

C

411

Up-/download active

33554537

C

411

Up-/download active

33554540

C

484

Simulation failure mode

33554576

C

485

Simulation measured variable

33554579

C

453

Flow override

33554580

C

833

Electronic temperature too low

33554625C

832Electronic temperature too high33554627

C

834

Process temperature too high33554629

C

835

Process temperature too low

33554630

C

992

Special event 1333554719

C

192

Special event 1033554768

C

392

Special event 1133554769

C

592

Special event 1233554770

C

495

Simulation diagnostic event

33554782

C

302

Device verification active

33554926

M

438

Dataset67108970

M

833

Electronic temperature too low

67109057

M

832

Electronic temperature too high67109059

M

834

Process temperature too high67109061

M

835

Process temperature too low

67109062

M

311

Electronic failure

67109090

M

992

Special event 1367109151

M

192

Special event 1067109200

M

392

Special event 1167109201

M

592

Special event 1267109202

S

825

Operating temperature

134217861

S

825

Operating temperature

134217863

S

842

Process limit

134217873

S

862

Partly filled pipe

134217874

S

830

Sensor temperature too high134217920

S

833

Electronic temperature too low

134217921

S

831

Sensor temperature too low

134217922

S

832

Electronic temperature too high134217923

S

912

Medium inhomogeneous

134217924

S

834

Process temperature too high134217925

S

835

Process temperature too low

134217926

S046

Sensor limit exceeded

134217928

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Endress+Hauser

System integration

Status signal

No.

Short text

Value

S

046

Sensor limit exceeded

134217930

S

140

Sensor signal

134217932

S

913

Medium unsuitable

134217933

S

274

Main electronic failure

134217934

S

274

Main electronic failure

134217935

S

912

Medium inhomogeneous

134217951

S

912

Inhomogeneous

134218005

S

992

Special event 13

134218015

S

843

Process limit

134218019

S

192

Special event 10134218064

S

392

Special event 11134218065

S

592

Special event 12134218066

S

912

Inhomogeneous

134218082

S

948

Tube damping too high134218088

S

944

Monitoring failed

134218182

I

1089

Power on268435545

I

1090

Configuration reset

268435546

I

1091

Configuration changed

268435547

I

1110

Write protection switch changed

268435566

I

1111

Density adjust failure268435567

I

1137

Electronic changed

268435593

I

1151

History reset

268435607

I

1155

Reset electronic temperature

268435611

I

1157

Memory error event list

268435613

I

1185

Display backup done

268435641

I

1186

Restore via display done

268435642

I

1187

Settings downloaded with display

268435643

I

1188

Display data cleared

268435644

I

1189

Backup compared

268435645

I

1209

Density adjustment ok

268435665

I

1221

Zero point adjust failure268435677

I

1222

Zero point adjustment ok

268435678

I

1256

Display: access status changed

268435712

I

1264

Safety sequence aborted

268435720

I

1335

Firmware changed

268435791

I

1361

Wrong web server login

268435817

I

1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

268435853

I

1398

CDI: access status changed

268435854

I

1444

Device verification passed

268435900

I

1445

Device verification failed

268435901

I

1446

Device verification active

268435902

I

1447

Record application reference data

268435903

I

1448

Application reference data recorded

268435904

89

System integration

90

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Status signal

No.

Short text

Value

I

1449

Recording application ref. data failed

268435905

I

1450

Monitoring off

268435906

I

1451

Monitoring on

268435907

I

1457

Failed: Measured error verification

268435913

I

1459

Failed: I/O module verification

268435915

I

1460

Failed: Sensor integrity verification

268435916

I

1461

Failed: Sensor verification

268435917

I

1462

Failed: Sensor electronic module verific.

268435918

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

10

Commissioning

10.1

Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist→  28
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  45

10.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer tothe section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  158.

10.3

Connecting via FieldCare• For FieldCare →  69 connection• For connecting via FieldCare →  71
• For the FieldCare →  72 user interface

10.4

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX
1.

XX
Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup

2.

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français3.

4.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français
Hauptmenü
Sprache0104-10104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 23

Endress+Hauser

Taking the example of the local display

91

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5

Configuring the measuring device• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
Main menu
Display language

1.

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 24

Taking the example of the local display

Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.

 Setup
Device tag→  93‣ System units→  93‣ Communication→  95‣ Medium selection→  97‣ I/O configuration→  98‣ Current input 1 to n

→  99‣ Status input 1 to n
‣ Current output 1 to n

→  101‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  105‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  113

1 to n92

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

10.5.1‣ Display→  116‣ Low flow cut off→  122‣ Partially filled pipe detection→  123‣ Advanced setup→  124

Defining the tag nameTo enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter aunique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1

XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 25
1

Header of the operational display with tag nameTag nameEnter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  72
Navigation"Setup" menu → Device tag
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device tag

Description
Enter the name for the measuring point.

10.5.2User entry
Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers
or special characters (e.g. @, %, /).

Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units

Endress+Hauser

Mass flow unit

→  94Mass unit→  94

Volume flow unit

→  9493

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Volume unit

→  94

Corrected volume flow unit

→  94

Corrected volume unit

→  94

Density unit

→  94

Reference density unit

→  94Temperature unit

→  95Pressure unit

→  95

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Mass flow unit

Description
Select mass flow unit.

Selection

Factory setting

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/h• lb/minResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Mass unit

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Volume flow unit

Select volume flow unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• l/h• gal/min (us)ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Volume unit

Select volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• l (DN > 150 (6"): m³ option)• gal (us)Corrected volume flow unit

Select corrected volume flow unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl/h• Sft³/min

ResultThe selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow parameter(→  148)
Corrected volume unit

Select corrected volume unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl• Sft³

Density unit

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/l• lb/ft³

Unit choose list

Country-dependent• kg/Nl• lb/Sft³

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Simulation process variable• Density adjustment (Expert menu)
Reference density unit

94

Select reference density unit.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter
Temperature unit

Commissioning

Description
Select temperature unit.

Selection
Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• bar a• psi aResultThe selected unit applies for:• Electronic temperature parameter(6053)• Maximum value parameter (6051)• Minimum value parameter (6052)• External temperature parameter (6080)• Maximum value parameter (6108)• Minimum value parameter (6109)• Carrier pipe temperature parameter(6027)• Maximum value parameter (6029)• Minimum value parameter (6030)• Reference temperature parameter(1816)• Temperature parameter
Pressure unit

Select process pressure unit.
ResultThe unit is taken from:• Pressure value parameter (→  98)• External pressure parameter (→  98)• Pressure value

10.5.3

Factory setting

Configuring the communication interface

The Communication submenu guides you systematically through all the parameters thathave to be configured for selecting and setting the communication interface.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication‣ Communication

Endress+Hauser

MAC address→  96

Default network settings→  96

DHCP client→  96

IP address→  96Subnet mask

→  96

Default gateway→  9695

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
MAC address

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

Displays the MAC address of the measuring
device.

Unique 12-digit character
string comprising letters andnumbers, e.g.:
00:07:05:10:01:5F

Each measuring device is given
an individual address.

 MAC = Media Access Control
Default network settings

Select whether to restore network settings.

• Off
• On

–

DHCP client

Select to activate/deactivate DHCP client
functionality.

• Off
• On

–

ResultIf the DHCP client functionality of the Web
server is activated, the IP address, Subnet
mask and Default gateway are set
automatically.
is via the MAC address Identificationof the measuring device.
IP address

Displays the IP address of the Web server ofthe measuring device.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)–

Subnet mask

Displays the subnet mask.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)–

Default gateway

Displays the default gateway.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (in theparticular octet)–

96

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5.4

Commissioning

Selecting and setting the medium

The Select medium wizard submenu contains parameters that must be configured inorder to select and set the medium.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Select medium‣ Medium selection

Endress+Hauser

Select medium→  98

Select gas type→  98Reference sound velocity→  98Temperature coefficient sound velocity→  98Pressure compensation→  98Pressure value→  98External pressure→  9897

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description• Liquid• Gas

Factory setting

Select medium–

Select gas type

The Gas option is selected in
Select measured gas type.
the Select medium parameter.

Reference sound velocity

In the Select gas typeparameter, the Others option
is selected.

Enter sound velocity of gas at 0 1 to 99 999.9999 m/°C (32 °F).
s–

Temperature coefficient soundvelocity

The Others option is selectedin the Select gas typeparameter.

Enter temperature coefficientfor the gas sound velocity.

Positive floatingpoint number

0 (m/s)/K

Pressure compensation–

Select pressure compensation
type.

• Off
• Fixed value• External value• Current input 1 *• Current input 2 *–Pressure value

The Fixed value option or theCurrent input 1…n option is
selected in the Pressurecompensation parameter.

Enter process pressure to be
used for pressure correction.

Positive floatingpoint number–

External pressure

The Fixed value option or theCurrent input 1…n option is
selected in the Pressurecompensation parameter.

Shows the external processpressure value.

Positive floatingpoint number–

Multi-frequency activation–

Switch the dual mode of thesensor on and off.

• No
• Yes

–

*

Select medium type.

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface
–

• Air
–
• Ammonia NH3• Argon Ar• Sulfur hexafluoride
SF6• Oxygen O2• Ozone O3• Nitrogen oxide
NOx• Nitrogen N2• Nitrous oxide N2O• Methane CH4• Hydrogen H2• Helium He• Hydrogen chloride
HCl• Hydrogen sulfide
H2S• Ethylene C2H4
• Carbon dioxide
CO2• Carbon monoxideCO• Chlorine Cl2• Butane C4H10• Propane C3H8
• Propylene C3H6
• Ethane C2H6
• Others

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.5

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
98

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers→  99I/O module 1 to n information→  99I/O module 1 to n type→  99

Apply I/O configuration→  99Alteration code→  99Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection / User entry

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O module.

• Not used
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)

I/O module 1 to n information

Shows information of the plugged I/O module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• EtherNet/IP

I/O module 1 to n typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch output *Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

Alteration code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O configuration.

Positive integer*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.6

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  100

Signal mode→  100

99

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

0/4 mA value→  100

20 mA value→  100

Current span

→  100

Failure mode→  100

Failure value→  100

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active

Active0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number

–

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterCurrent span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA
Country-specific:• 4...20 mA NAMUR • 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value–

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number

–10.5.7

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input‣ Status input 1 to n

100

Assign status input→  101

Terminal number→  101

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Active level→  101

Terminal number→  101

Response time status input→  101

Terminal number→  101

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection / User entry

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by the status input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Active level

Define input signal level at which the assigned function istriggered.

• High• Low

Response time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the input signal level must
be present before the selected function is triggered.

5 to 200 ms

10.5.8Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Terminal number→  102

Signal mode→  102

Assign current output 1 to n

→  103

Current span

→  103

0/4 mA value→  104

20 mA value→  104

Fixed current→  104

Damping output 1 to n

→  104101

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Failure mode→  104

Failure current→  104

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Passive• Active

Active102

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign current output 1 to n–

Select process variable forcurrent output.

• Off–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Concentration *• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature *• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• HBSI *• Pressure *Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA• Fixed current

Endress+Hauser

103Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

0/4 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

20 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Fixed current

The Fixed current option is
selected in the Current spanparameter (→  103).

Defines the fixed output
current.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Damping output 1 to n

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  103) and
one of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Set reaction time for output
signal to fluctuations in themeasured value.

0.0 to 999.9 s–

Failure mode

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  103) and
one of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  103):• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Defined value–

Failure current

The Defined value option is
selected in the Failure modeparameter.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA*

104

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5.9Commissioning

Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  105

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  106

Terminal number→  106

Signal mode→  106

Assign pulse output→  106

Value per pulse→  106

Pulse width→  106

Failure mode→  107

Invert output signal→  107105

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active–

Assign pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter parameter.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *Value per pulse

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  105) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  106).

Enter measured value at which Signed floating-pointa pulse is output.
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  105) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  106).

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

–

106

0.05 to 2 000 ms

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Failure mode

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  105) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  106).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses–

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

–

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  108

Terminal number→  108

Signal mode→  108

Assign frequency output→  109

Minimum frequency value→  109

Maximum frequency value→  110

Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  110

Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  110

Failure mode→  110

Failure frequency→  110Invert output signal→  110107

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active–

108

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign frequency output

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)parameter.

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Concentration *• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature *• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
amplitude 0• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• HBSI *• Pressure

Minimum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Enter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

Endress+Hauser–

109

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Maximum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Enter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz–

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Enter measured value forminmum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Enter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz–Failure frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  105)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  109).

Enter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz–

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

–

*

110

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  111

Terminal number→  111Signal mode→  111

Switch output function→  112Assign diagnostic behavior→  112Assign limit→  112Assign flow direction check→  113

Assign status→  113

Switch-on value→  113

Switch-off value→  113

Switch-on delay→  113

Switch-off delay→  113

Failure mode→  113

Invert output signal→  113

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active–

Endress+Hauser

111Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

The Switch option is selectedin the Operating modeparameter.

Select function for switch
output.

• Off• On• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status–

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning–

Assign limit• The Switch option is
Select process variable for limit
selected in the Operating
function.
mode parameter parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameterparameter.

112• Mass flow–
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Concentration *• Temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Oscillation
damping• Pressure

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Assign flow direction check• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Flow direction check
option is selected in the
Switch output function
parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe –
detection• Low flow cut off

Switch-on value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

Switch-off value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed–

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

–

*

Factory setting–

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.10 Configuring the relay output
The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n
Switch output function

Endress+Hauser→  114113

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Assign flow direction check→  114

Assign limit→  115

Assign diagnostic behavior→  115

Assign status→  115

Switch-off value→  115

Switch-on value→  116

Failure mode→  116

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Digital Output–

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Assign flow direction check

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Flow direction
check option is selected.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

–

114

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Assign limit

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Mass flow–
function.
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Dynamic viscosity• Concentration *• Kinematic viscosity• Temp.
compensateddynamic viscosity• Temp.
compensatedkinematic viscosity• Temperature• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Oscillation
damping• Pressure

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe –
detection• Low flow cut off

Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberEndress+Hauser–

Country-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

115

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Switch-on value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s–

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed–*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.5.11 Configuring the local display
The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that canconfigured for configuring the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Display‣ Display

116

Format display→  117

Value 1 display→  1180% bargraph value 1→  119

100% bargraph value 1→  119

Value 2 display→  120

Value 3 display→  1210% bargraph value 3→  121

100% bargraph value 3→  121

Value 4 display→  121

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Format display

Endress+Hauser

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description
Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

Selection / Userentry
• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

Factory setting–

117

Commissioning

Parameter
Value 1 display

118

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Mass flow–
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Weighted density
average *• Weighted
temperature
average *• Concentration *• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature *• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Pressure

Factory setting

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterEndress+Hauser

119Commissioning

Parameter
Value 2 display

120

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow• Carrier volume
flow• Target correctedvolume flow
• Carrier correctedvolume flow
• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative• S&W volume flow
• Water cut• Oil density• Water density• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water correctedvolume flow
• Oil correctedvolume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average• Weighted
temperature
average• Concentration• Dynamic viscosity• Kinematic viscosity• Temp.
compensateddynamic viscosity• Temp.
compensatedkinematic viscosity• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
frequency 1• Oscillation
amplitude 0• Oscillation
amplitude 1• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Factory setting

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping 1• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• Exciter current 1• HBSI• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Pressure
Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 2 display
parameter(→  120)–0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number–Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 2 display
parameter(→  120)–*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

121Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.5.12 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable→  122On value low flow cutoff→  122

Off value low flow cutoff→  122

Pressure shock suppression→  122

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow–

Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter on value for low flow cut
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  122).

Off value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  122).

–

Pressure shock suppression

A process variable is selectedEnter time frame for signal
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  122).
shock suppression).

–

122

0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

10.5.13 Configuring the partial filled pipe detection
The Partial filled pipe detection wizard guides you systematically through all parametersthat have to be set for configuring the monitoring of the pipe filling.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Partially filled pipe detection‣ Partially filled pipe detection
Assign process variable→  123

Low value partial filled pipe detection→  123High value partial filled pipe detection→  123

Response time part. filled pipe detect.

→  123

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry

Assign process variable–

Select process variable for partiallyfilled pipe detection.

• Off• Density• Reference density

Low value partial filled pipe
detection

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  123).

Enter lower limit value for deactivating
partialy filled pipe detection.

Signed floating-point
numberHigh value partial filled pipe
detection

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  123).

Enter upper limit value for deactivating
partialy filled pipe detection.

Signed floating-point
numberResponse time part. filled pipe
detect.

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  123).

Enter time before diagnostic message is 0 to 100 s
displayed for partially filled pipe
detection.

Endress+Hauser

123

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.6

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

0104-1Main menu
Display language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/ ../Setup
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

4.

/ ../Advanced setup
Ent. access code5.

Device tag
Def. access code0092-1****
A0032223-EN

The number of submenus can vary depending on the device version. Some submenus
are not dealt with in the Operating Instructions. These submenus and the parameters
they contain are explained in the Special Documentation for the device.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup

124Enter access code→  125‣ Calculated values→  125‣ Sensor adjustment→  126‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  127‣ Display→  129

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning‣ WLAN settings‣ Concentration‣ Heartbeat setup

10.6.1‣ Configuration backup→  137‣ Administration→  138

Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Enter access code

Description

User entry

Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.

10.6.20 to 9 999

Calculated values

The Calculated values submenu contains parameters for calculating the corrected volume
flow.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Calculated values‣ Calculated values‣ Corrected volume flow calculation

Endress+Hauser

Corrected volume flow calculation→  126

External reference density→  126

Fixed reference density→  126

Reference temperature→  126

Linear expansion coefficient→  126

Square expansion coefficient→  126125

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Corrected volume flow calculation–

Select reference density forcalculating the correctedvolume flow.

• Fixed reference
density• Calculated
reference density• External reference
density• Current input 1 *• Current input 2 *–External reference density

In the Corrected volume flow
calculation parameter, theExternal reference density
option is selected.

Shows external reference
density.

Floating point
number with sign–

Fixed reference density

The Fixed reference density
option is selected in the
Corrected volume flow
calculation parameterparameter.

Enter fixed value for reference
density.

Positive floatingpoint number–

Reference temperature

The Calculated reference
density option is selected in
the Corrected volume flow
calculation parameterparameter.

Enter reference temperature
for calculating the reference
density.

–273.15 to 99 999 °C Country-specific:• +20 °C
• +68 °F

Linear expansion coefficient

The Calculated reference
density option is selected in
the Corrected volume flow
calculation parameterparameter.

Enter linear, medium-specificexpansion coefficient forcalculating the reference
density.

Signed floating-point
number–Square expansion coefficient

The Calculated reference
density option is selected in
the Corrected volume flow
calculation parameterparameter.

For media with a non-linear
expansion pattern: enter thequadratic, medium-specificexpansion coefficient forcalculating the reference
density.

Signed floating-point
number–*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.3Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality ofthe sensor.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment‣ Sensor adjustment

126

Installation direction→  127

Installation angle pitch→  127

Installation angle roll→  127‣ Zero point adjustment→  127

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User entry

Installation direction

Set sign of flow direction to match the direction of the arrow on
the sensor.

• Flow in arrow direction• Flow against arrow direction

Installation angle pitch

Enter the installation angle in degree.

–180 to 180 °Installation angle rollEnter the installation angle in degree.

–180 to 180 °Zero point adjustment
All measuring devices are calibrated in accordance with state-of-the-art technology.
Calibration takes place under reference conditions→  204. Therefore, a zero point
adjustment in the field is generally not required.
Experience shows that zero point adjustment is advisable only in special cases:• To achieve maximum measuring accuracy even with low flow rates.
• Under extreme process or operating conditions (e.g. very high process temperatures orvery high-viscosity fluids).
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment → Zero point adjustment‣ Zero point adjustment
Zero point adjustment control→  127

Progress→  127

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User interface

Factory setting

Zero point adjustment control

Start zero point adjustment.

• Cancel• Busy• Zero point adjust failure• Start–

Progress

Shows the progress of the process.

0 to 100 %–10.6.4

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Assign process variable→  128

Unit totalizer 1 to n

→  128

127

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Totalizer operation mode→  128

Failure mode→  128

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Factory setting

Assign process variable–

Unit totalizer 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Select process variable totalizer Unit choose listin the Assign process variable unit.
parameter (→  128) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Totalizer operation mode

A process variable is selected
Select totalizer calculationin the Assign process variable mode.
parameter (→  128) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total–

Failure mode

A process variable is selected
Define totalizer behavior inin the Assign process variable alarm condition.
parameter (→  128) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

–

*

128

Select process variable fortotalizer.

Selection• Off–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.6.5

Commissioning

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display

Endress+Hauser

Format display→  130

Value 1 display→  1310% bargraph value 1→  132

100% bargraph value 1→  132

Decimal places 1→  132

Value 2 display→  133

Decimal places 2→  134

Value 3 display→  1340% bargraph value 3→  134

100% bargraph value 3→  134

Decimal places 3→  134

Value 4 display→  134

Decimal places 4→  134

Display language→  135

Display interval→  135

Display damping→  135

Header→  135

Header text

→  135

Separator→  135

Backlight→  135

129

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Format display

130

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description
Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

Selection / Userentry
• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

Factory setting–

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter
Value 1 display

Endress+Hauser

Commissioning

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Mass flow–
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume
flow *• Carrier volume
flow *• Target correctedvolume flow *• Carrier correctedvolume flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow
alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow
alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume
flow *• Oil correctedvolume flow *• Water correctedvolume flow *• Weighted density
average *• Weighted
temperature
average *• Concentration *• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature *• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
amplitude 0 *• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Pressure

Factory setting

131Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

132

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter
Value 2 display

Endress+Hauser

Commissioning

Prerequisite
A local display is provided.

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None–• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Target mass flow
• Carrier mass flow
• Target volume
flow• Carrier volume
flow• Target correctedvolume flow
• Carrier correctedvolume flow
• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative• GSV flow
• GSV flow
alternative• NSV flow
• NSV flow
alternative• S&W volume flow
• Water cut• Oil density• Water density• Oil mass flow
• Water mass flow
• Oil volume flow
• Water correctedvolume flow
• Oil correctedvolume flow
• Water volume flow
• Weighted density
average• Weighted
temperature
average• Concentration• Dynamic viscosity• Kinematic viscosity• Temp.
compensateddynamic viscosity• Temp.
compensatedkinematic viscosity• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature• Electronic
temperature• Oscillation
frequency 0• Oscillation
frequency 1• Oscillation
amplitude 0• Oscillation
amplitude 1• Frequency
fluctuation 0• Frequency
fluctuation 1

Factory setting133Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting• Oscillation
damping 0• Oscillation
damping 1• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 0• Oscillation
damping
fluctuation 1• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• Exciter current 1• HBSI• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Pressure
Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 2 display
parameter(→  120)–0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 kg/h• 0 lb/min

100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number–Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

For the picklist, see
the Value 2 display
parameter(→  120)–

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx–

134

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch *• Français *• Español *• Italiano *• Nederlands *• Portuguesa *• Polski *• русский язык(Russian) *• Svenska *• Türkçe *• 中文 (Chinese) *• 日本語(Japanese) *• 한국어 (Korean) *• Bahasa Indonesia *• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese) *• čeština (Czech) *English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s–

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s–

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text–

Header text

In the Header parameter, theFree text option is selected.

Enter display header text.

Max. 12 characterssuch as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,
%, /)

–

Separator

A local display is provided.

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

• . (point)• , (comma). (point)

Backlight

One of the following
conditions is met:
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O"Separate 4-line display,illum.; 10m/30ft cable;
touch control"

Switch the local display
backlight on and off.

• Disable• Enable–*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.6WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.

Endress+Hauser

135Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings‣ WLAN settings
WLAN→  136WLAN mode→  136

SSID name→  136

Network security→  136

Security identification→  137

User name→  137WLAN password→  137WLAN IP address→  137WLAN passphrase→  137

Assign SSID name→  137

SSID name→  137

Connection state→  137

Received signal strength→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

WLAN

–

Switch WLAN on and off.

• Disable• Enable–

WLAN mode–

Select WLAN mode.

• WLAN accesspoint• WLAN Client–

SSID name

The client is activated.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

––

Network security–

Select the security type of the
WLAN network.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK• EAP-PEAP withMSCHAPv2• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 noserver authentic.
• EAP-TLS–

136

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Security identification–

Select security settings anddownload these settings via
menu Data management >Security > WLAN.

• Root certificate• Device certificate• Device private key–

User name–Enter user name.

––

WLAN password–

Enter WLAN password.

––

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the device
WLAN interface.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)–

WLAN passphrase

The WPA2-PSK option is
selected in the Security typeparameter.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
charactersshould be changedSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

during commissioning
for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

–

SSID name• The User-defined option is
selected in the Assign SSID
name parameter.
• The WLAN access point
option is selected in the
WLAN mode parameter.

Enter the user-defined SSID
name (max. 32 characters).

EH_devicedesignation_last 7
digits of the serial
number (e.g.
EH_Promass_300_A
802000)Connection state–

Displays the connection status. • Connected• Not connected–

Received signal strength–

Shows the received signal
strength.

–10.6.7

Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,
The user-defined SSID
letters and specialname may only be
assigned once. If the SSID charactersname is assigned morethan once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

• Low• Medium• HighConfiguration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup

Endress+Hauser

Operating time→  138

Last backup→  138

Configuration management→  138137

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Backup state→  138

Comparison result→  138

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)

Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved to HistoROM
backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in the HistoROM
backup.

• Cancel• Execute backup• Restore• Compare• Clear backup data

Backup stateShows the current status of data saving or restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.6.8Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.

138

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration‣ Define access code→  139‣ Reset access code→  139

Device reset→  140

Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  139

Confirm access code→  139

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code

Endress+Hauser

Operating time→  140

Reset access code→  140

139

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds(s)

Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprising numbers, lettersand special characters

For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service
organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service interface CDI-RJ45)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset

Description
Reset the device configuration - either entirely or in part - to adefined state.

10.7

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup

Simulation

The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation

140

Assign simulation process variable→  142

Process variable value→  142

Status input simulation→  142

Input signal level→  142

Current input 1 to n simulation→  142

Value current input 1 to n

→  142

Current output 1 to n simulation→  142Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Endress+Hauser

Commissioning

Value current output 1 to n

→  142

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

→  142

Frequency value 1 to n

→  142

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  143

Pulse value 1 to n

→  143

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  143

Switch status 1 to n

→  143

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  143

Switch status 1 to n

→  143

Device alarm simulation→  143

Diagnostic event category→  143

Diagnostic event simulation→  143

141

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable for thesimulation process that is activated.

• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume flow *• Carrier volume flow *• Target corrected volume
flow *• Carrier corrected volume
flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume flow *• Oil corrected volume
flow *• Water corrected volume
flow *• Weighted density
average *• Weighted temperature
average *• Temperature• Concentration *Process variable value

A process variable is selected in the
Assign simulation process variable
parameter (→  142).

Enter the simulation value for theselected process variable.

Depends on the process
variable selected

Status input simulation–

Switch simulation of the status input on • Off
and off.
• On

Input signal level

In the Status input simulation
parameter, the On option is selected.

Select the signal level for the simulation • Highof the status input.
• Low

Current input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the current input
on and off.

• Off
• On

Value current input 1 to n

In the Current input 1 to n simulation
parameter, the On option is selected.

Enter the current value for simulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

Current output 1 to n simulation–

Switch the simulation of the current
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Value current output 1 to n

In the Current output 1 to n
Enter the current value for simulation.
simulation parameter, the On option is
selected.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Switch the simulation of the frequency
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Frequency value 1 to n

In the Frequency output simulation
1 to n parameter, the On option is
selected.

Enter the frequency value for thesimulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

142

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter
Pulse output simulation 1 to nCommissioning

Prerequisite
In the Operating mode parameter, thePulse option is selected.

Description
Set and switch off the pulse output
simulation.
Fixed value option: Pulse
 For
width parameter (→  106)

Selection / User entry /User interface• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting value

defines the pulse width of thepulses output.
Pulse value 1 to n

In the Pulse output simulation 1 to n
parameter, the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

Switch output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theSwitch option is selected.

Switch the simulation of the switch
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Switch status 1 to n–

Select the status of the status output for • Openthe simulation.
• Closed

Relay output 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay output
on and off.

• Off
• On

Switch status 1 to n

The On option is selected in the Switch
output simulation 1 to n parameterparameter.

Select status of the relay output for thesimulation.

• Open• Closed

Pulse output simulation–

Set and switch off the pulse output
simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting value

Fixed value option: Pulse
 For
width parameter defines thepulse width of the pulses output.
Pulse value

In the Pulse output simulation
parameter, the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Set and switch off the pulse output
simulation.

0 to 65 535

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and off.

• Off
• On

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event category.

• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• ProcessDiagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event to simulate
this event.

• Off• Diagnostic event picklist(depends on the category
selected)

Logging interval–

Define the logging interval tlog for data 1.0 to 3 600.0 s
logging. This value defines the timeinterval between the individual data
points in the memory.

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.8

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  144• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  60
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  145

Endress+Hauser

143

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

10.8.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  139).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  139) toconfirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressedfor 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protectedparameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  59.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display is
indicated by the →  59 Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation→ Access status
Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Reset all totalizers

Defining the access code via the Web browser

144

1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  139).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

3.

Commissioning

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  139) toconfirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  59.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser isindicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → AccessstatusResetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
1.

Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  140).

2.

Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  144.

10.8.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write accessto the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via EtherNet/IP protocol

Endress+Hauser

145

Commissioning

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed→  147. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of theparameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A00294252.

146

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  147. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the headerof the operational display and in the navigation view.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation

11

Operation

11.1

Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  59. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) .

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  91
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  214

11.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display →  116• On the advanced settings for the local display →  129

11.4

Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

Endress+Hauser‣ Measured variables→  148‣ Input values→  150‣ Output values→  151‣ Totalizer→  149

147

Operation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

11.4.1"Measured variables" submenu

The Measured variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Measured variables‣ Measured variables
Mass flow→  148

Volume flow

→  148

Corrected volume flow

→  148

Density→  148

Reference density→  149

Temperature→  149

Pressure value→  149

Concentration→  149

Target mass flow

→  149

Carrier mass flow

→  149

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Mass flow

Prerequisite–

Description
Displays the mass flow currently
measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  94).
Volume flow–

Displays the volume flow currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  94).
Corrected volume flow–

Displays the corrected volume flow
currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Correctedvolume flow unit parameter(→  94).
Density–Shows the density currently measured.
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter (→  94).

148

Signed floating-point
numberEndress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation

Parameter
Reference density

Prerequisite–

Description

User interface

Displays the reference density currently Signed floating-point
calculated.
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Reference
density unit parameter (→  94).

Temperature–

Shows the medium temperature
currently measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from theTemperature unit parameter(→  95).
Pressure value–

Displays either a fixed or externalpressure value.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Pressure
unit parameter (→  95).
Concentration

For the following order code:
Order code for "Application package",
option ED "Concentration"


Target mass flow

With the following conditions:
Order code for "Application package",
option ED "Concentration"


Carrier mass flow

The software options currently
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

The software options currently
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

With the following conditions:
Order code for "Application package",
option ED "Concentration"



The software options currently
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

11.4.2

Displays the concentration currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from theConcentration unit parameter.

Displays the mass flow currently
measured for the target medium.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  94).

Displays the mass flow currently
measured for the carrier medium.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  94).

"Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer‣ Totalizer

Endress+Hauser

Totalizer value 1 to n

→  150

Totalizer overflow 1 to n

→  150

149

Operation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface

Totalizer value 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  128) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Displays the current totalizer countervalue.

Signed floating-point
numberTotalizer overflow 1 to n

A process variable is selected in the
Assign process variable parameter(→  128) of the Totalizer 1 to nsubmenu.

Displays the current totalizer overflow.

Integer with sign

11.4.3"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  150‣ Status input 1 to n

→  150

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n

→  150

Measured current 1 to n

→  150

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values 1 to n

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.

150

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
→  151

Value status input

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

11.4.4User interface• High• Low

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  151‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  152‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  152

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Output current 1 to n

→  152

Measured current 1 to n

→  152

151

Operation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current 1

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency 1 to n

→  152

Pulse output 1 to n

→  152

Switch status 1 to n

→  152

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Output frequency 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch status 1 to n

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

• Open• Closed

Displays the current switch output
status.

User interface
0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n

152

Switch status→  153

Switch cycles→  153

Max. switch cycles number→  153

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch status

Shows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

11.5

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  92)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  124)

11.6

Performing a totalizer reset

Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handlingControl Totalizer 1 to n

→  153

Preset value 1 to n

→  153

Reset all totalizers→  153

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Control Totalizer 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Control totalizer value.
in the Assign process variable
parameter (→  128) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.

• Totalize• Reset + hold
• Preset + hold
• Reset + totalize• Preset + totalize• HoldPreset value 1 to n

A process variable is selected
Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-pointin the Assign process variable Dependency
numberparameter (→  128) of the
The unit of the selected
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
process variable is
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
parameter (→  128).

Country-specific:• 0 kg• 0 lb––

Reset all totalizers

Endress+Hauser

Reset all totalizers to 0 andstart.

• Cancel• Reset + totalize

Factory setting–

153

Operation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

11.6.1

Function scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter

Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started or continues running.

Reset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.

Reset + totalize

The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.

Preset + totalize

The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter andthe totaling process is restarted.

Hold

Totalizing is stopped.

11.6.2Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Reset + totalize

Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.

11.7

Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  71.
• Web browser
Function range• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Display of the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.7740.69 kg/h
-100s

0A0016357

 26

Chart of a measured value trend• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.

154

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Operation

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging
Assign channel 1→  156

Assign channel 2→  156

Assign channel 3→  156

Assign channel 4→  157

Logging interval→  157

Clear logging data

→  157

Data logging→  157

Logging delay→  157

Data logging control→  157

Data logging status→  157

Entire logging duration→  157‣ Display channel 1‣ Display channel 2‣ Display channel 3‣ Display channel 4

Endress+Hauser

155

Operation

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Assign channel 1

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Assign process variable to logging
channel.

• Off• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Target mass flow *• Carrier mass flow *• Target volume flow *• Carrier volume flow *• Target corrected volume
flow *• Carrier corrected volume
flow *• Density• Reference density• Reference density
alternative *• GSV flow *• GSV flow alternative *• NSV flow *• NSV flow alternative *• S&W volume flow *• Water cut *• Oil density *• Water density *• Oil mass flow *• Water mass flow *• Oil volume flow *• Water volume flow *• Oil corrected volume
flow *• Water corrected volume
flow *• Concentration *• Temperature• Carrier pipe
temperature *• Electronic temperature• Oscillation frequency 0• Oscillation amplitude *• Frequency fluctuation 0• Oscillation damping 0• Oscillation damping
fluctuation 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0• HBSI *• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Pressure

Assign channel 2

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Assign process variable to logging
channel.

Picklist, see Assign
channel 1 parameter(→  156)

Assign process variable to logging
channel.

Picklist, see Assign
channel 1 parameter(→  156)

software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.
Assign channel 3

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.
software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.

156

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter
Assign channel 4

Operation

Prerequisite
The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Description

Selection / User entry /User interface

Assign process variable to logging
channel.

Picklist, see Assign
channel 1 parameter(→  156)

software options currently
 The
enabled are displayed in the
Software option overview
parameter.
Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Define the logging interval for data
logging. This value defines the timeinterval between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 3 600.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM application
package is available.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

Data logging–

Select the data logging method.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Logging delay

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Enter the time delay for measured
overwriting option is selected.
value logging.

0 to 999 h

Data logging control

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Start and stop measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.

• None• Delete + start• Stop

Data logging status

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Displays the measured value logging
overwriting option is selected.
status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging parameter, the Not Displays the total logging duration.
overwriting option is selected.

Positive floating-point
number*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

Solution

Local display dark and no output
signals

Supply voltage does not match thevalue indicated on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage .

Local display dark and no output
signals

The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
wrong.

Local display dark and no output
signals

No contact between connecting
cables and terminals.

Check the connection of the cables
and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output
signals

Terminals are not plugged into the
I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into themain electronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output
signals

I/O electronics module is defective.
Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  189.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter bysimultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker bysimultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

The cable of the display module isnot plugged in correctly.

Insert the plug correctly into themain electronics module anddisplay module.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  189.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm"
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures →  168

Text on local display appears in aforeign language and cannot be
understood.

Incorrect operating language isconfigured.

1. Press  +  for 2 s ("homeposition").
2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter(→  135).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between thedisplay module and the electronics
is interrupted.

• Check the cable and theconnector between the mainelectronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  189.

Possible causes

Solution

For output signals
Error
Signal output outside the valid
range

158

Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  189.

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error
display, but signal output isincorrect, though in the valid range.

Check and correct the parameter
configuration.

Device measures incorrectly.

1. Check and correct parameter
configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified inthe "Technical Data".

Configuration error or device isoperated outside the application.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

For access
Error

Possible causes

Solution

No write access to parameters

Hardware write protection enabled

Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  145.

No write access to parameters

Current user role has limited accessauthorization

1. Check user role →  59.
2. Enter correct customer-specificaccess code →  59.

No connection via EtherNet/IP

Device plug connected incorrectly

Check the pin assignment of theconnector .

Not connecting to Web server

Web server disabled

Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it ifnecessary→  67.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet
interface of the computer

1. Check the properties of theInternet protocol (TCP/IP)→  62→  63.
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

• Incorrect IP address• IP address is not known

1. If addressing via hardware: open
the transmitter and check the IP
address configured (last octet).
2. Check the IP address of themeasuring device with the network
manager.
3. If the IP address is not known,
set DIP switch no. 10 to ON, restartthe device and enter the factory IP
address 192.168.1.212.

Not connecting to Web server

communication
 EtherNet/IP
is interrupted by enabling the
DIP switch.
Web browser setting "Use a Proxy
Server for Your LAN" is enabled

Disable the use of the proxy serverin the Web browser settings of thecomputer.
Using the example of MS Internet
Explorer:
1. Under Control Panel open
Internet options.
2. Select the Connections tab andthen double-click LAN settings.
3. In the LAN settings disable theuse of the proxy server and selectOK to confirm.

Apart from the active network• Make sure that no other network
connection to the measuring device,connections are established byother network connections are also
the computer (also no WLAN)
being used.
and close other programs with
network access to the computer.
• If using a docking station for
notebooks, make sure that a
network connection to anothernetwork is not active.
Not connecting to Web serverEndress+Hauser

Incorrect WLAN access data

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device andoperating device →  62.

WLAN communication disabled–

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Error

Possible causes

Solution

Not connecting to Web server,
FieldCare or DeviceCare

No WLAN network available• Check if WLAN reception ispresent: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection isenabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or
unstable

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device is outside ofreception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet
communication• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Data transfer active

Wait until data transfer or current
action is finished.

Connection lost

1. Check cable connection andpower supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser andrestart if necessary.

Not using optimum version of Web
server.

1. Use the correct Web browser
version →  61.
2. Clear the Web browser cache andrestart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratioof the Web browser.

No or incomplete display ofcontents in the Web browser• JavaScript not enabled• JavaScript cannot be enabled

1. Enable JavaScript.
2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
interface (port 8000)

Firewall of computer or network ispreventing communication

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network isor DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
preventing communicationinterface (via port 8000 or TFTP
ports)

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Web browser frozen and operation
no longer possible

Content of Web browser
incomplete or difficult to read

12.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1

Transmitter

Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

160

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1 2 3 4 5A0029629

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
network status
Port 1 active: EtherNet/IP
Port 2 active: EtherNet/IP and service interface (CDI)

LED
1

2

2

3

4

5

Endress+Hauser

Color

Meaning

Off

Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green

Supply voltage is ok.

Off

Firmware error.

Green

Device status is ok.

Flashing green

Device is not configured.

Flashing red

A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Red

A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior
has occurred.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts/self-test.

Device status/module
status (during start-up)

Flashes red slowly

If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.

Flashes red quickly

If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem whenreading the firmware.

Network status

Off

The device does not have an EtherNet/IP address.

Green

EtherNet/IP connection is active.

Flashing green

The device has an Ethernet/IP address but noEtherNet/IP connection is active.

Red

The EtherNet/IP address of the device has been
assigned twice.

Flashing red

EtherNet/IP connection is in the "time out" mode.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts/self-test.

Off

Not connected or no connection established.

White

Connected and connection established.

Flashing white

Communication not active.

Off

Not connected or no connection established.

Yellow

Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow

Communication not active.

Supply voltage

Device status/module
status (normal
operation)

Port 1 active:
Ethernet/IP

Port 2 active:
Ethernet/IP andservice interface (CDI)

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

12.3

Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter →  181• Via submenus →  182
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

162

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

842

Process limit

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 1073-digit number

Operating elements
Key

MeaningPlus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

Endress+Hauser

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

12.3.2

Calling up remedial measuresS

XXXXXXXXX

20.50

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN

 27

Message about remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time of occurrence
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.

164

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  181• Via submenu →  182
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

12.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

12.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
Endress+Hauser

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

Function check (C)XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

C485 Simu...

P
P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

3

Out of spezification (S)Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal→  162
Diagnostic information→  163
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter →  181• Via submenu →  182
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

842

Process limit

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 10712.5.23-digit number

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.

166

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

The user is in the Diagnostics menu.
1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

12.6

Diagnostic information via communication interface

12.6.1

Reading out diagnostic information

The current diagnostic event and associated diagnostic information can be read out via the
input assembly (fix assembly):
Bytes

0

1

2

3

4

↓

Content"Empty" or "Reserved"

5

6

7

↓

↓

"Empty" or "Padding
bytes"

Diagnostic numberof the diagnostic
event that isdisplayed in the
Actualdiagnostics
parameter , e.g.
242

For the content of bytes 8 to 16

12.7

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.7.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:Endress+Hauser

Options

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. A
diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.

Warning

The device continues to measure. The totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is
generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Eventlogbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with theoperational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.

167

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

12.8

Overview of diagnostic information• The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables
affected increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
• All of the measured variables affected in the entire Promass instrument family arealways listed under "Measured variables affected". The measured variables available
for the device in question depend on the device version. When assigning themeasured variables to the device functions, for example to the individual outputs, allof the measured variables available for the device version in question are available
for selection.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can bechanged. Change the diagnostic information →  167

12.8.1

Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

022 Temperature sensor defective
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

1. Inspect sensor
2. Check process condition

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Alarm

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x10000BE• 0x10000BF• 0x10000D5• 0x10000D6

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x80000C8• 0x80000CA

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

062 Sensor connection faulty
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check or replace sensor
electronic module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor andtransmitter
3. Replace sensor

Remedy instructions

Short text

063 Exciter current faulty

168

1. Check or replace sensor
electronic module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor andtransmitter
3. Replace sensor

Short text

046 Sensor limit exceeded

1)

Remedy instructions

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Check or replace sensor
electronic module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor andtransmitter
3. Replace sensor

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x10000DB• 0x10000DC• 0x1000113• 0x1000114

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80002B3

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

082 Data storage

1. Check module connections
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

083 Memory content
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

140 Sensor signal asymmetrical1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Alarm

1. Check or replace sensor
electronic module (ISEM)
2. If available: Check connection
cable between sensor andtransmitter
3. Replace sensor

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000CC

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

144 Measuring error too high1)0x10000E7

1. Restart device
0x10000A0
2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT

Diagnostic information
No.

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)

1. Check or change sensor
2. Check process conditions

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Alarm

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10001C7

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

12.8.2

Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

201 Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

242 Software incompatible
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

1. Check software
2. Flash or change main electronics
moduleCoding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100014B

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000067

169

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

252 Modules incompatible

1. Check electronic modules
2. Change electronic modules

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

252 Modules incompatible
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check if correct electronic modul
is plugged
2. Replace electronic module

Remedy instructions

Short text

262 Sensor electronic connection faulty
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check or replace connection
cable between sensor electronic
module (ISEM) and mainelectronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics

Remedy instructions

Short text

270 Main electronic failure

Change main electronic module

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

271 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Change main electronic module

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

272 Main electronic failure

170

Remedy instructions

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100006B

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10002C0

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000149

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x1000078• 0x100007C• 0x1000080• 0x100009F• 0x10002D7

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100007D

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000079

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

273 Main electronic failure

Change electronic

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

275 I/O module 1 to n defective

Change I/O module

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

283 Memory content

1. Reset device
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

302 Device verification active

Device verification active, please
wait.

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

311 Electronic failure

1. Do not reset device
2. Contact service

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x1000098• 0x10000E5

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100007A

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x100007B• 0x1000081

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x10000E1• 0x100016F

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x20001EE

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x40000E2

171

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or mainelectronics

Remedy instructions

Short text

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)

Remedy instructions

Short text

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1. Transfer data or reset device
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

374 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

172

Replace user interface board
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter

Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty

1)

Remedy instructions

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10002C7

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000095

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x10000A1• 0x10000C7• 0x10000C9• 0x10000D4• 0x10000DA• 0x1000120• 0x10002CB• 0x10002CC• 0x10002CD• 0x10002CE• 0x10002CF• 0x10002D0

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10002D1

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000CE

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusiveelectronic modules

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

382 Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

383 Memory content
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Restart device
2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

387 HistoROM backup failed

Contact service organization

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

12.8.3Remedy instructions

Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O
configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device
description and check wiring

Remedy instructions

Short text

330 Flash file invalid

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

0x1000107

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100016D

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100016E

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000288

Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information
No.

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x400026C

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x40002C9173

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

331 Firmware update failed

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

410 Data transfer

1. Check connection
2. Retry data transfer

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

412 Processing download

Download active, please wait

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

431 Trim 1 to n

Carry out trim

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

437 Configuration incompatible

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

438 Dataset

174

Remedy instructions

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check data set file
2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new
configuration

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10002CA

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100008B

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000204

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000004

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000060

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x400006A

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

441 Current output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current output settings

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

442 Frequency output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

443 Pulse output 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check pulse output settings

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

444 Current input 1 to n

1. Check process
2. Check current input settings

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

453 Flow override

Deactivate flow override

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

484 Failure mode simulation

Deactivate simulation

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x8000099• 0x80000B6

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x800008A• 0x8000122

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x800008C• 0x8000121

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80001EB

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000094

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000090

175

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

485 Measured variable simulation

Deactivate simulation

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation frequency
outputStatus signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation pulse output

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

494 Switch output simulation 1 to n

176

Remedy instructions

Deactivate simulation switch output

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000093

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x20001EC

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x200000E

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x200008D

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x200008E

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x200008F

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation

Deactivate simulation

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

496 Status input simulation

Deactivate simulation status input

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check I/O hardware
configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot

Remedy instructions

Short text

528 Concentration settings faulty
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check concentration settings
2. Check input values e.g. pressure,temperature

Remedy instructions

Short text

529 Concentration settings faulty
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

1. Check concentration settings
2. Check input values e.g. pressure,temperature

Remedy instructions

Short text

537 Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP address

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x200015E

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x2000170

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x1000276

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000387

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000389

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x100014A

177

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

594 Relay output simulation

Deactivate simulation switch output

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

12.8.4No.
803 Current loop

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module
F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Reduce ambient temp. around thesensor housing

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

831 Sensor temperature too low

Increase ambient temp. around thesensor housing

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x10000AD

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000C0

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000C2

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

832 Electronic temperature too high1780x20002BA

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

830 Sensor temperature too high1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

Status signal

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information1)

Remedy instructions

Reduce ambient temperature

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x80000C3• 0x80002D4

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Increase ambient temperature

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

834 Process temperature too highReduce process temperature

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning• 0x80000C1• 0x80002D3

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000C5

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

835 Process temperature too low

1)

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

833 Electronic temperature too low

1)

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Increase process temperature

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000C6

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

842 Process limit
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic informationNo.

Low flow cut off active!
1. Check low flow cut off
configuration

Remedy instructions

Short text

862 Partly filled pipe

1. Check for gas in process
2. Adjust detection limits

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

882 Input signal
Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

1. Check input configuration
2. Check external device or process
conditions

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000091

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000092

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x1000031• 0x1000257

179

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

910 Tubes not oscillating

1. Check electronic
2. Inspect sensor

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check process cond.
2. Increase system pressure

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

913 Medium unsuitable
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Alarm

0x1000050

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)• 0x80000C4• 0x80000DF• 0x8000115• 0x8000162

1. Check process conditions
2. Check electronic modules or
sensor

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80000CD

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

941 API temperature out of specification
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check process temperature withselected API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

Remedy instructions

Short text

942 API density out of specification
Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check process density withselected API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

Remedy instructions

Short text

943 API pressure out of specification

180

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information1)

Remedy instructions

Short text

912 Medium inhomogeneous

1)

Remedy instructions

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Check process pressure withselected API commodity group
2. Check API related parameters

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000380

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x800033B

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x800037F

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

944 Monitoring failed

1)

Check process conditions forHeartbeat Monitoring

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior [from thefactory] 1)

Warning

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x80001C6

Diagnostic behavior can be changed.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

948 Oscillation damping too highCheck process conditions

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

12.9

Coding of diagnostic
information (hex)0x8000168

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  164• Via Web browser →  165• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  166• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  166
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  182
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

Endress+Hauser

Actual diagnostics→  182

Previous diagnostics→  182

Operating time from restart→  182

Operating time→  182181

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)12.10 Diagnostic list
Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 28

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  164• Via Web browser →  165• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  166• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  166

12.11 Event logbook
12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list

182

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 29

Taking the example of the local display• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  168• Information events →  183
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event• : Occurrence of the event• : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  164• Via Web browser →  165• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  166• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  166
For filtering the displayed event messages →  183

12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)12.11.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

Endress+Hauser

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

183

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Info number

184

Info name

I1092

HistoROM backup deleted

I1111

Density adjust failure

I1137

Electronic changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronic temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1184

Display connected

I1209

Density adjustment ok

I1221

Zero point adjust failure

I1222

Zero point adjustment ok

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1278

I/O module reset detected

I1335

Firmware changed

I1361

Web server: login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1447

Record application reference data

I1448

Application reference data recorded

I1449

Recording application ref. data failed

I1450

Monitoring off

I1451

Monitoring on

I1457

Measured error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1460

HBSI verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finishedI1618

I/O module 2 replaced

I1619

I/O module 3 replaced

I1621

I/O module 4 replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

Reset all totalizers

I1625

Write protection activated

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server: login successful

I1628

Display: login successful

I1629

CDI: login successful

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info number

Info name

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display: login failed

I1633

CDI: login failed

I1634

Reset to factory settings

I1635

Reset to delivery settings

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

12.12 Resetting the measuring device
Using theDevice reset parameter (→  140) it is possible to reset the entire device
configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.

12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings

Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is resetto this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory
setting.

Restart device

The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM)to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup

Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from theelectronics memory to the S-DAT.

 This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.
12.13 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information

Endress+Hauser

Device tag→  186

Serial number→  186

Firmware version→  186185

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Device name→  186

Order code→  186

Extended order code 1→  186

Extended order code 2→  186

Extended order code 3→  186

ENP version→  186

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Shows name of measuring point.

Max. 32 characters, such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

–Serial number

Shows the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Promass 300/500–

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks (e.g. /).

–Character string–

Character string–

Character string–

Character string–
Order code

Shows the device order code.

Extended order code 1

The name can be found on the
nameplate of the transmitter.

The order code can be found on the
nameplate of the sensor andtransmitter in the "Order code" field.

Shows the 1st part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3

Shows the 3rd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

186

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.14 Firmware history
Releasedate

Firmwareversion10.2017 01.00.zz

Order codefor"Firmwareversion"Firmwarechanges

Option 77

Original firmware

Documentation
type

OperatingInstructions

Documentation

BA01733D

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:• Product root: e.g. 8Q3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on thedevice.
• Text search: Manufacturer's information• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

Endress+Hauser

187

Maintenance

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

13

Maintenance

13.1

Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  191→  193

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

188

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Repair14

Repair

14.1

General notes

14.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2

Spare parts

W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here andcan be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  186) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4

ReturnThe requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type andnational legislation.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

2.

Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

189

Repair

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

14.5

Disposal

If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize thedisposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing thismarking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to Endress+Hauser for
disposal under the applicable conditions.

14.5.1
1.

Removing the measuring device

Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive fluids.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

190

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

15

Accessories

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Proline 300 transmitter

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display/operation• Housing• Software Order code: 8X3BXX
 Installation Instructions EA01200D
Remote display andoperating module
DKX001• If ordered directly with the measuring device:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line illum.;10 m (30 ft) Cable; touch control"• If ordered separately:• Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, preparedfor remote display"• DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001• If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1/2""• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  215.
 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna

External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna widearea".
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications.
• Further information on the WLAN interface →  70.

 Order number: 71351317
 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Protective cover

Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505
 Installation Instructions EA01160D
Endress+Hauser

191

Accessories

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

15.1.2For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Heating jacket

Is used to stabilize the temperature of the fluids in the sensor. Water, water vaporand other non-corrosive liquids are permitted for use as fluids.

 If using oil as a heating medium, please consult with Endress+Hauser.
• If ordered together with the measuring device:order code for "Enclosed accessories"• Option RB "heating jacket, G 1/2" internal thread"• Option RC "heating jacket, G 3/4" internal thread"• Option RD "Heating jacket, NPT 1/2" internal thread"• Option RE "Heating jacket, NPT 3/4" internal thread"• If ordered subsequently:
Use the order code with the product root DK8003.

 Special Documentation SD02161D
15.2

Communication-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Fieldgate FXA42

Is used to transmit the measured values of connected 4 to 20 mA analog
measuring devices, as well as digital measuring devices
Technical Information TI01297S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01778S• Product page: www.endress.com/fxa42

Field Xpert SMT70

The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable forcommissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digitalcommunication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver libraryand is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
Technical Information TI01342S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01709S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt70

Field Xpert SMT77

The Field Xpert SMT77 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in areas categorized as Ex Zone 1.
Technical Information TI01418S
 •• Operating
Instructions BA01923S• Product page: www.endress.com/smt77

192

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

15.3

Accessories

Service-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle ofa project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to aplant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning andduring the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way ofchecking their status and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
data manager

The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
Information TI00133R
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00247R

Cerabar M

The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.
Information TI00426P and TI00436P
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00200P and BA00382P

Cerabar S

The pressure transmitter for measuring the absolute and gauge pressure of gases,
steam and liquids. It can be used to read in the operating pressure value.
Technical Information TI00383P
 •• Operating
Instructions BA00271P

iTEMP

The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable forthe measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in themedium temperature.

 "Fields of Activity" document FA00006T

Endress+Hauser

193

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

16Technical data

16.1

Application

The measuring device is intended only for the flow measurement of liquids and gases.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Mass flow measurement based on the Coriolis measuring principle

Measuring system

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  14

194

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

16.3
Measured variable

Input

Direct measured variables• Mass flow
• Density• Temperature
Calculated measured variables• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Reference density

Measuring range

Measuring range for liquids
DN
Measuring device

DN
Compatible pipe diameter

Measuring range full scalevalues min(F) to max(F)

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

[kg/h][lb/min]

25

1

25/40

1/1½

0 to 20 000

0 to 735

50

2

50/80

2/3

0 to 80 000

0 to 2 94080

380/1003/4

0 to 200 000

0 to 7 350100

4100/150

4/6

0 to 550 000

0 to 20 210

Measuring range for gases
The full scale value depends on the density and the sound velocity of the gas used and canbe calculated with the formula below:max(G) = minimum (max(F) · ρG : x ; ρG · cG · π/2 · (di)2 · 3600)
 max(G)Maximum full scale value for gas [kg/h]

 max(F)Maximum full scale value for liquid [kg/h]

 max(G) <  max(F) max(G) can never be greater than  max(F)ρG

Gas density in [kg/m³] at operating conditionsx

Constant dependent on nominal diametercG

Sound velocity (gas) [m/s]diMeasuring tube internal diameter [m]

DN

x

[mm]

[in]

[kg/m3]

25

1

100

50

2

100

80

3

120

100

4

200

Calculation example for gas• Sensor: Promass Q, DN 50• Gas: Air with a density of 60.3 kg/m³ (at 20 °C and 50 bar)
• Measuring range (liquid): 80 000 kg/h
• x = 100 kg/m³ (for Promass Q, DN 50)
Endress+Hauser

195

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Maximum possible full scale value: max(G) =  max(F) · ρG : x = 80 000 kg/h · 60.3 kg/m³ : 100 kg/m³ = 48 240 kg/h
Recommended measuring range
Flow limit →  211

Operable flow range

Over 1000 : 1.
Flow rates above the preset full scale value do not override the electronics unit, with theresult that the totalizer values are registered correctly.

Input signal

External measured values
Various pressure and temperature measuring devices can be ordered from Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  193
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  196.
Digital communication
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
EtherNet/IP.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Pressure• Temperature• Density

Status input

196

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Configurable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

16.4
Output signal

Technical data

OutputEtherNet/IP
Standards

In accordance with IEEE 802.3

Current output 4 to 20 mA
Signal mode

Can be set to:• Active• Passive

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)• Fixed current

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Oscillation frequency 0• Oscillation damping 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0
range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
 The
application packages.

Current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive

Endress+Hauser

Order code

"Output; input 2" (21), "Output; input 3" (022):
Option C: current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive

Signal mode

Passive

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR• 4 to 20 mA US• 4 to 20 mA• Fixed current

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 VLoad

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

197

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999 s

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Oscillation frequency 0• Oscillation damping 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0
range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
 The
application packages.

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive• Passive NAMUR Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Adjustable

Assignable measured
variables• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output

198

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Assignable measured
variables

Technical data

• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density• Temperature• Electronics temperature• Oscillation frequency 0• Oscillation damping 0• Signal asymmetry• Exciter current 0
range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
 The
application packages.

Switch output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Configurable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density• Temperature• Totalizer 1-3• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Partially filled pipe detection• Low flow cut off
range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
 The
application packages.

Relay output

Endress+Hauser

Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

199

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value• Mass flow
• Volume flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Density• Reference density• Temperature• Totalizer 1-3• Flow direction monitoring• Status• Partially filled pipe detection• Low flow cut off
range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more
 The
application packages.

User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
Signal on alarm

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
EtherNet/IP
Device diagnostics

Device condition can be read out in Input Assembly

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure mode

200

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
EtherNet/IP• Via service interface• CDI-RJ45 service interface• WLAN interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web browser
Plain text display

Endress+HauserWith information on cause and remedial measures

201

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred• EtherNet/IP network available• EtherNet/IP connection established Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  160
Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data

Protocol• The CIP Networks Library Volume 1: Common Industrial Protocol• The CIP Networks Library Volume 2: EtherNet/IP Adaptation of CIP

Communication type

• 10Base-T• 100Base-TX

Device profile

Generic device (product type: 0x2B)

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Device type ID

0x103B

Baud rates

Automatic ¹⁰⁄₁₀₀ Mbit with half-duplex and full-duplex detection

Polarity

Auto-polarity for automatic correction of crossed TxD and RxD pairs

Supported CIP connections

Max. 3 connections

Explicit connections

Max. 6 connections

I/O connections

Max. 6 connections (scanner)

Configuration options formeasuring device• DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing• Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare)• Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems• Web browser• Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) integrated in the measuring device

Configuration of the EtherNet
interface• Speed: 10 MBit, 100 MBit, auto (factory setting)• Duplex: half-duplex, full-duplex, auto (factory setting)Configuration of the device
address• DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing (last octet)• DHCP• Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare)• Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems• Web browser• EtherNet/IP tools, e.g. RSLinx (Rockwell Automation)

Device Level Ring (DLR)

Yes

System integration

Information regarding system integration →  75.
• Cyclic data transmission• Block model• Input and output groups

16.5
Terminal assignment

202

Power supply→  32Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Device plugs available→  32

Pin assignment, device plug→  32

Supply voltage

Order code for"Power supply"

Terminal voltage

Option D

DC 24 V

Option E

AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10%

50/60 HzDC 24 V–

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range
±20%

±20%

AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10%–

50/60 Hz

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)switch-on current

Current consumption

Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure• Totalizers stop at the last value measured.
• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.

Electrical connection→  33

Potential equalization→  39Terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:• NPT ½"
• G ½"• M20• Device plug for digital communication: M12

Cable specification→  29Endress+Hauser

203

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

16.6
Reference operating
conditions

Performance characteristics• Error limits based on ISO 11631• Water with +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F) at2 to 6 bar (29 to 87 psi)
• Specifications as per calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs that are traced to ISO 17025.
To obtain measured errors, use the Applicator sizing tool →  193

Maximum measured erroro.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm³ = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature
Base accuracy
Design fundamentals →  207
Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)±0.05 % o.r. (PremiumCal; order code for "Calibration flow", option D, for mass flow)±0.10 % o.r.
Mass flow (gases)±0.35 % o.r.
Density±0.2 kg/m³ / ±0.0002 g/cm³
Valid between 20 °C and 60 °C. The measured error increases by 0.015 kg/(m3⋅°C) outside
the temperature range
Valid range for density calibration: 0 to 2 000 kg/m³, +20 to +60 °C (+68 to +140 °F)
For highly accurate density measurement, avoid significant tensile stresses due to theinstallation and ensure the flow velocity in the nominal diameter is > 0.1 m/s.
Temperature±0.1 °C ± 0.003 · T °C (±0.18 °F ± 0.003 · (T – 32) °F)
Zero point stability
DN

Zero point stability

[mm]

[in]

[kg/h][lb/min]

25

1

0.36

0.013

50

2

1.8

0.066

80

3

5.4

0.20

100

4

11.5

0.42

Flow values
Flow values as turndown parameter depending on nominal diameter.

204

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

SI units
DN

1:1

1:10

1:20

1:50

1:100

1:500

[mm]

[kg/h][kg/h][kg/h][kg/h][kg/h][kg/h]

25

20 000

2 000

1 000

400

200

40

50

80 000

8 000

4 000

1 600

800

160

80

200 000

20 000

10 000

4 000

2 000

400

100

550 000

55 00027 500

11 000

5 500

1 100

US units
DN

1:1

1:10

1:20

1:50

1:100

1:500

[inch][lb/min][lb/min][lb/min][lb/min][lb/min][lb/min]

1

736

73.6

36.8

14.7

7.4

1.5

2

2 944

294.4

147.2

58.9

29.5

5.9

3

7 360

736

368

147.2

73.6

14.7

4

20 240

2 024

1 012

404.8

202.4

40.5

Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.
Current output
Accuracy±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading
Accuracy

Repeatability

Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)o.r. = of reading; 1 g/cm3 = 1 kg/l; T = medium temperature
Base repeatability
Design fundamentals →  207
Mass flow and volume flow (liquids)±0.025 % o.r.
Mass flow (gases)±0.25 % o.r.
Density (liquids)±0.1 kg/m3 / ±0.0001 g/cm3
Temperature±0.05 °C ± 0.0025 · T °C (±0.09 °F ± 0.0015 · (T–32) °F)

Response time
Endress+Hauser

The response time depends on the configuration (damping).
205

Technical data

Influence of ambient
temperature

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

Influence of medium
temperature

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Mass flow and volume flowo.f.s. = of full scale value
When there is a difference between the temperature for zero point adjustment and theprocess temperature, the additional measured error of the sensor is typically
DN 25 (1"): ±0.0001 % o.f.s./°C (±0.00005 % o.f.s./°F)
DN 50, 80, 100 (2", 3", 4"): ±0.00015 % o.f.s./°C (±0.000075 % o.f.s./°F)
The effect is reduced if zero point adjustment is performed at process temperature.
Density
When there is a difference between the density calibration temperature and the processtemperature, the typical measured error of the sensor is±0.015 kg/m3 /°C (±0.0075 kg/m3 /°F)
3[kg/m ]
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
-200

-100

-150

-50

0

50

100

150

200 [°C]

300

400

[°F]
-300

-200

-100

0

100

200

A0028731

Temperature±0.005 · T °C (± 0.005 · (T – 32) °F)
Influence of medium
pressure206

Mass flow
DN[% o.r./bar]±0.0005[% o.r./psi]±0.00003

[mm]

[in]

25

1

–0.0040–0.0002750

2–0.0025–0.0001780

3–0.0085–0.00057100

4–0.0040–0.00027

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Volume flow
DN[% o.r./bar]±0.0008[% o.r./psi]±0.00005

[mm]

[in]

25

1

–0.0011–0.000073

50

2+0.0009+0.000060

80

3–0.0061–0.004070

100

4–0.0034–0.000227[% o.r./bar]±0.0006[% o.r./psi]±0.00004

Density
DN

Design fundamentals

[mm]

[in]

25

1

–0.0029–0.000193

50

2–0.0034–0.000227

80

3–0.0024–0.000160

100

4–0.0006–0.000040

o.r. = of reading, o.f.s. = of full scale value
BaseAccu = base accuracy in % o.r., BaseRepeat = base repeatability in % o.r.
MeasValue = measured value; ZeroPoint = zero point stability
Calculation of the maximum measured error as a function of the flow rate
Flow rate

Maximum measured error in % o.r.

ZeroPoint³ BaseAccu ⋅ 100± BaseAccu
A0021339
A0021332

ZeroPoint< BaseAccu ⋅ 100±

ZeroPoint
MeasValue ⋅ 100

A0021333

A0021334

Calculation of the maximum repeatability as a function of the flow rate
Flow rate³

Maximum repeatability in % o.r.

½ ⋅ ZeroPoint
BaseRepeat ⋅ 100

A0021340
A0021335<½ ⋅ ZeroPoint
BaseRepeat ⋅ 100

ZeroPoint± ½ ⋅ MeasValue ⋅ 100
A0021336

Endress+Hauser

A0021337

207

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Example for maximum measured error
E [%]
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 Q [%]
A0028741

E
Q

Maximum measured error in % o.r. (example with PremiumCal)
Flow rate in % of maximum full scale value

16.7
Installation conditions→  21

16.8
Ambient temperature
range

Installation

Environment→  23→  23
Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature–50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F)

Climate class

DIN EN 60068-2-38 (test Z/AD)

Degree of protection

Measuring device• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure• With the order code for "Sensor options", option CM: IP69 can also be ordered
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration- and shockresistanceVibration sinusoidal, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6• 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz• Total: 1.54 g rms

208

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27
6 ms 30 g
Rough handling shocks, according to IEC 60068-2-31
Mechanical load

Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)

As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9

Process

Medium temperature range
Standard version–50 to +205 °C (–58 to +401 °F)

Order code for "Measuring tube
mat., wetted surface", option SA, SB

Low-temperature version–196 to +150 °C (–320 to +302 °F)

Order code for "Measuring tube
mat., wetted surface", option LA

NOTICE
Material fatigue due to excessive
temperature difference!
‣ Maximum temperature
difference of media used: 300 K

Dependency of ambient temperature on medium temperature
Ta
A
B

Tm
A0031121

 30
Ta
Tm
A
B

Exemplary representation, values in the table below.

Ambient temperature range
Medium temperature
Maximum permitted medium temperature Tm at Ta max = 60 °C (140 °F); higher medium temperatures Tm
require a reduced ambient temperature Ta
Maximum permitted ambient temperature Ta for the maximum specified medium temperature Tm of thesensorValues for devices used in the hazardous area:
Separate Ex documentation (XA) for the device →  223.

Endress+Hauser

209

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Not insulated

InsulatedA
VersionStandard version

A

B

Ta

Tm

Ta

Tm

Ta

Tm

Ta

Tm

60 °C (140 °F)

205 °C (401 °F)––

60 °C (140 °F)

110 °C (230 °F)

50 °C (122 °F)

205 °C (401 °F)

Density
Pressure-temperature
ratings
Sensor housing

B

0 to 5 000 kg/m3 (0 to 312 lb/cf)
An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections isprovided in the "Technical Information" document

The sensor housing is filled with helium and protects the electronics and mechanics inside.
If a measuring tube fails (e.g. due to process characteristics like corrosive or abrasive
fluids), the fluid will initially be contained by the sensor housing.
In the event of a tube failure, the pressure level inside the sensor housing will riseaccording to the operating process pressure. If the user judges that the sensor housing
burst pressure does not provide an adequate safety margin, the device can be fitted with arupture disk. This prevents excessively high pressure from forming inside the sensor
housing. Therefore, the use of a rupture disk is strongly recommended in applications
involving high gas pressures, and particularly in applications in which the process pressureis greater than 2/3 of the sensor housing burst pressure.
If there is a need to drain the leaking medium into a discharge device, the sensor should be
fitted with a rupture disk. Connect the discharge to the additional threaded connection .
If the sensor is to be purged with gas (gas detection), it should be equipped with purge
connections.
Do not open the purge connections unless the containment can be filled immediately
with a dry, inert gas. The use of helium at low pressure is recommended for purging.
Maximum pressure: 0.5 bar (7.3 psi)
Burst pressure of the sensor housing
The following sensor housing burst pressures are only valid for standard devices and/or
devices equipped with closed purge connections (not opened/as delivered).
If a device fitted with purge connections (order code for "Sensor option", option CH "Purge
connection") is connected to the purge system, the maximum pressure is determined by thepurge system itself or by the device, depending on which component has the lower
pressure classification.
If the device is fitted with a rupture disk (order code for "Sensor option", option CA "Rupturedisk"), the rupture disk trigger pressure is decisive .
The sensor housing burst pressure refers to a typical internal pressure which is reachedprior to mechanical failure of the sensor housing and which was determined during type
testing. The corresponding type test declaration can be ordered with the device (order codefor "Additional approval", option LN "Sensor housing burst pressure, type test").
DN

210

Sensor housing burst pressure

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

25

1

220

3 191

50

2

160

2 320

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

DN

Sensor housing burst pressure

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

80

3

150

2 175

100

4

120

1 740

For information on the dimensions: see the "Mechanical construction" section of the"Technical Information" document
Rupture disk

To increase the level of safety, a device version with a rupture disk with a trigger pressureof 10 to 15 bar (145 to 217.5 psi)can be used (order code for "Sensor option", option"rupture disk").
For information on the dimensions of the rupture disk: see the "Mechanicalconstruction" section of the "Technical Information" document

Flow limit

Select the nominal diameter by optimizing between the required flow range andpermissible pressure loss.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section →  195• The minimum recommended full scale value is approx. 1/20 of the maximum full scale
value• In most applications, 20 to 50 % of the maximum full scale value can be considered ideal• A low full scale value must be selected for abrasive media (such as liquids with entrainedsolids): flow velocity < 1 m/s (< 3 ft/s).
To calculate the flow limit, use the Applicator sizing tool →  193

Pressure loss

To calculate the pressure loss, use the Applicator sizing tool →  193

System pressure

16.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

Weight

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.
All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with EN/DIN
PN 40 flanges. Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing",
option A "Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:• Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
• Cast transmitter version, stainless(Order code for "Housing", option L "Cast, stainless"): +6 kg (+13 lbs)
• Transmitter version for hygienic area
(Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"): +0.2 kg (+0.44 lbs)

Endress+Hauser

211

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Weight in SI units
DN[mm]

Weight [kg]

25

11

50

33

80

60

100

149

Weight in US units

Materials

DN[in]

Weight [lbs]

1

24

2

73

3

132

4

329

Transmitter housing
Order code for "Housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)• Option L "Cast, stainless": cast, stainless steel, 1.4409 (CF3M) similar to 316L
Window material
Order code for "Housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass• Option B "Stainless, hygienic": polycarbonate• Option L "Cast, stainless": glass
Seals
Order code for "Housing":
Option B "Stainless, hygienic": EPDM and silicone
Cable entries/cable glands
Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable gland
Coupling M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½"

Material
Non-Ex: plastic
Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic
Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"

212

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Order code for "Housing", option B "Stainless, hygienic"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable glandMaterial

Cable gland M20 × 1.5

Plastic

Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½"

Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"

Order code for "Housing", option L "Cast, stainless"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable glandMaterial

Cable gland M20 × 1.5

Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)

Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½"
Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"

Sensor housing• Acid and alkali-resistant outer surface• Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L); manifold: stainless steel, 1.4404 (316/316L)
Process connections
Flanges according to EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) / according to ASME B16.5 / as per JIS
B2220:
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (F316/F316L)
Available process connections→  214
Seals
Welded process connections without internal seals
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Endress+Hauser

213

Technical data

Process connections

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Fixed flange connections:• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) flange• EN 1092-1 (DIN 2512N) flange• ASME B16.5 flange• JIS B2220 flange
Process connection materials →  213

Surface roughness

All data relate to parts in contact with fluid. The following surface roughness quality canbe ordered.
• Not polished• Ramax = 0.76 µm (30 µin)
• Ramax = 0.38 µm (15 µin)

16.11 Human interface
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Equipment:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control"• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  70

A0026785

 31

Operation with touch control

Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.
214

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  191.
• The remote display and operating module DKX001 is only available for thefollowing housing versions, order code for "Housing":• Option A "Aluminum, coated"• Option L "Cast, stainless"• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any onetime.

A0026786 32

Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements
The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  214.
Housing material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choiceof transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing

Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing"Material

Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated"

AlSi10Mg, coated

AlSi10Mg, coated

Option L "Cast, stainless"Cast stainless steel,1.4409 (CF3M) similar
to 316L

1.4409 (CF3M)

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable→  30Endress+Hauser

215

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Dimensions
Information on the dimensions:"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation→  68Service interface→  69Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.
Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with Web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
Special Documentation forinterfacedevice →  223• WLAN interface• Ethernet-based
fieldbus (EtherNet/IP,
PROFINET)

DeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  193

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  193

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →Downloads
Web serverThanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.

216

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and themeasuring device:• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)• Export event list (.csv file)• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance• Download driver for system integration• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  221)
Web server special documentation →  223

HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

Device memory

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event logbook such as diagnostic eventsfor example• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Driver for system integration for exporting
via Web server, e.g:
EDS for EtherNet/IP• Measured value logging ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (usedby firmware at run time)• Peakhold indicator (min/max values)• Totalizer values• Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
• Serial number• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Attachable to the user interface board in
the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter
neck part

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in theconnection compartment

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.

Endress+Hauser

217

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transfer
Manual• Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)• Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.:
EDS for EtherNet/IP
Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels• User configurable recording interval• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals
Currently available certificates and approvals can be called up via the productconfigurator.
CE mark

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

RCM-tick symbol

The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval

The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions areprovided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to thisdocument on the nameplate.

218

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Sanitary compatibility• 3-A approval• Only measuring devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LP "3A"
have 3-A approval.
• The 3-A approval refers to the measuring device.
• When installing the measuring device, ensure that no liquid can accumulate on theoutside of the measuring device.
Remote transmitters must be installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard.
• Accessories (e.g. heating jacket, weather protection cover, wall holder unit) must be
installed in accordance with the 3-A Standard.
Each accessory can be cleaned. Disassembly may be necessary under certain
circumstances.
• EHEDG-tested
Only devices with the order code for "Additional approval", option LT "EHEDG" have beentested and meet the requirements of the EHEDG.
To meet the requirements for EHEDG certification, the device must be used with processconnections in accordance with the EHEDG position paper entitled "Easy Cleanable Pipe
Couplings and Process Connections" (www.ehedg.org).
• FDA• Food Contact Materials Regulation (EC) 1935/2004

Pharmaceuticalcompatibility• FDA 21 CFR 177• USP <87>
• USP <88> Class VI 121 °C• TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability• cGMP
Devices with order code for "Test, certificate", option JG "Compliance with requirements
derived from cGMP, declaration" are in accordance with cGMP requirements relating
to the surfaces of wetted parts, design, FDA 21 CFR material conformity, USP Class VI
tests and TSE/BSE-compliance.
A manufacturer's declaration specific to the serial number is supplied with the device.

EtherNet/IP certification

The measuring device is certified and registered by the ODVA (Open Device Vendor
Association). The measuring system meets all the requirements of the following
specifications:• Certified in accordance with the ODVA Conformance Test
• EtherNet/IP Performance Test
• EtherNet/IP PlugFest compliance• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)

Pressure Equipment
Directive• With the identification PED/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate,Endress+Hauser confirms conformity with the "Essential Safety Requirements" specified
in Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according togood engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Article 4 paragraph 3 of thePressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. The range of application is indicated intables 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.

Radio approval

The measuring device has radio approval.
For detailed information regarding radio approval, see Special Documentation→  223

Endress+Hauser

219

Technical data

Additional certification

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

CRN approval
Some device versions have CRN approval. A CRN-approved process connection with a CSA
approval must be ordered for a CRN-approved device.
Tests and certificates• EN10204-3.1 material certificate, parts and sensor housing in contact with medium• Pressure testing, internal procedure, inspection certificate• PMI test (XRF), internal procedure, wetted parts, test report• Compliance with requirements derived from cGMP, Declaration• EN10204-2.1 confirmation of compliance with the order and EN10204-2.2 test report
Testing of welded connections
OptionTest standard

Component

ISO 23277 AL2x (PT)
ASME
ASME
NORSOK Measuring tube Process connection
ISO 10675-1 AL1 (RT, DR) B31.3 VIII Div.1
M-601
NFS Appx. 4+8
CF

x

KK

x

KP

x

KR
K1
K2
K3
K4

x
x
x
x
x

PT

RT

PT

RT

PT

RT

VT, PT

VT, RT

PT

DR

PT

DR

PT

DR

VT, PT

VT, DR

PT = penetrant testing, RT = radiographic testing, VT = visual testing, DR = digital radiography
All options with test report

Other standards andguidelines

220• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Fc: vibrate (sinusoidal).
• IEC/EN 60068-2-31
Environmental influences: Test procedure - Test Ec: shocks due to rough handling,
primarily for devices.
• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 80
The application of the pressure equipment directive to process control devices
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• NAMUR NE 132
Coriolis mass meter• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.
Detailed information on the application packages:
Special Documentation for the device →  223
Diagnostics functions

Package

Description

Extended HistoROM

Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of themeasured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

Heartbeat Technology

Package

Description

Heartbeat Verification+Monitoring

Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, toan external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on themeasuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.

Endress+Hauser

221

Technical data

Concentration

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Package

Description

Concentration

Calculation and outputting of fluid concentrations
The measured density is converted to the concentration of a substance of a binary
mixture using the "Concentration" application package:• Choice of predefined fluids (e.g. various sugar solutions, acids, alkalis, salts,ethanol etc.)• Common or user-defined units (°Brix, °Plato, % mass, % volume, mol/l etc.) for
standard applications.
• Concentration calculation from user-defined tables.

Petroleum

Package

Description

Petroleum

The most important parameters for the Oil & Gas Industry can be calculated anddisplayed with this application package.
• Corrected volume flow and calculated reference density in accordance with the"API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 11.1"• Water content, based on density measurement• Weighted mean of the density and temperature

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  191

16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Standard documentation

Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline Promass Q

KA01262D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 300

KA01339D

Technical Information
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promass Q 300

TI01277D

222

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Technical data

Description of Device Parameters
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promass 300

GP01114D

Device-dependent
additional documentation

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01405D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01439D

cCSAus XP

XA01373D

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01372D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01507D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de

XA01468D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01470D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de

XA01469DNEPSI Ex nA

XA01471DEAC Ex d/Ex de

XA01656DEAC Ex nA

XA01657DJPN Ex d

XA01778D

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

Special Documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module

SD01793D

Web server

SD01968D

Heartbeat Technology

SD01982D

Concentration measurement

SD02004

PetroleumSD02096D

Endress+Hauser

223

Technical data

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Installation Instructions
Contents

Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets andaccessories• Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via W@M Device Viewer →  189• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  191

224

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Index

Index
0…9

3-A approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

A

Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

C

Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 218
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
cGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Check
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

D

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Endress+Hauser

Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 208
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Design fundamentals
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device documentation
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Diagnostic information
Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 166
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Diagnostics
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
DIP switches
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Displaysee Onsite display
Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 215
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

225

IndexE

Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 54
EHDEG-certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Electrical connection
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operating tools
Via Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Environment
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
EtherNet/IP certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

F

FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fix assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 26
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Food Contact Materials Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

226

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Functionssee ParameterG

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Information on the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Inspection
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inspection check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation conditions
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Rupture disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

L

Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

M

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Measured values
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Measuring device
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Measuring range
Calculation example for gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
For gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
For liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Measuring range, recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Medium pressure
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Medium temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Mounting dimensions
see Installation dimensions
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

O

Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 163
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Endress+Hauser

Index

Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Calculated values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Measured variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Partially filled pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . 123
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 107, 111
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 152
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Select medium (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 151
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Zero point adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
227

Index

Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Process variables
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
RCM-tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Reading out diagnostic information, EtherNet/IP . . . 167
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Repairs
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Rupture disk
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Triggering pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
SensorMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Sensor housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
228

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Low flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Partial filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 105, 107
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Special mounting instructions
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 165
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Structure
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Submenu
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 140
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125
Calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promass Q 300 EtherNet/IP

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 152
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Zero point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Symbols
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
see Measuring device design
System fileRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

T

Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 214
Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tests and certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tool tipsee Help text
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Endress+Hauser

Index

Totalizer
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Transmitter
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

U

Use of the measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
see Designated use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

V

Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

W

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 189
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 189
WeightSI units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
US units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
WizardCurrent input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Partially filled pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 105, 107, 111
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Select medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

229

*71506074*
71506074

www.addresses.endress.com